JP2014200253A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine, such as a pinball game machine (pachinko machine) or a rotary drum game machine (slot machine), having characteristics in read-ahead notice means.SOLUTION: A first read-ahead notice (a winning read-ahead notice by a performance A (read-ahead performance 1)) of a pattern variable display by pattern display means 212, 214 is harder to be performed in a stop display state than in a variable display state (for example, a probability based on a random number range stipulated in a lottery table in Fig. 51(d) and a probability based on a random number range stipulated in a lottery table in Fig. 51(e)).

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning area where the game ball can enter, a starting area, a variable winning opening, etc. Is common. When a game ball enters these, a privilege is given to the player, such as paying out a prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition, some of these game tables have a prefetch notice means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in the prefetch notice means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine characterized by prefetching notice means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-mentioned object is
A determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure;
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of prefetch notice;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of prefetching notices is a first prefetching notice,
At least one of the plurality of types of prefetching notices is a second prefetching notice,
The symbol variation display is capable of performing at least a symbol pattern stop display corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display.
The state of the stop display is more difficult to execute the first look-ahead notice than the state of the variable display,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by prefetching notice means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) shows an example of a special symbol stop symbol, (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol, and (c) shows an example of an ordinary stop symbol. It is. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for success / failure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for success / failure determination, (c) is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination. (A) is a figure which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation time determination table, (b) is a figure which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation time determination table. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the control unit 400. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure prefetching process which CPU304 of the main control part 300 performs, (b) is prior determination information in the prior determination result storage area prepared in RAM308 of the main control part 300. It is a figure which shows an example in which is stored. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of prefetch notice control processing. (A) is a figure which shows the kind of prefetch notice in this embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows one of the lottery tables which can perform the prefetch notice using a specific design, (c). FIG. 10B is a diagram showing one of the lottery tables for whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice using the hold display, and FIG. 6D is a hold display in which the face pattern of the frog character is selected and the aura effect is also performed in the hold effect. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example which there was a prize in the special pattern display of a special figure, and the holding | maintenance increased. It is a figure which shows another example in which there was a prize during the symbol variation display of the special figure, and the holding increased. It is a figure which shows an example at the time of winning a prize while the symbol of a special figure is stopped. It is a figure which shows the case where although it is a non-electric support state, it wins a common figure change game and there was 1 ball winning to the 2nd special figure starting port 232. It is a figure which shows the specific example which added the prefetch notice by background effect to this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the modification of the prefetch notice control process shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch notice based on the modification of the prefetch notice control process shown in FIG. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prefetch notice lottery process, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prefetch notice execution process. Specific example of pre-reading notice in the example in which the lottery for the first pre-reading notice (pre-fetching notice using a specific pattern) and the second lot of pre-reading notice (pre-reading notice using a hold display) are performed separately FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the prefetch notice control process of the 1st sub control part 400 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch notice in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the prefetch notice in a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the change of the hold display which served as the prefetching advance notice. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the prefetch notice in a 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the change in the short time of the display mode of the hold display in a 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the concept of prefetch notice. It is a figure which shows the example which combined the pattern demonstrated using FIG.29 (b). It is the time chart which showed the relationship between multiple types of prefetching advance notice, and a symbol fluctuation display. It is a time chart which showed the relationship between one kind of prefetching advance notice, and symbol change display. It is a time chart for demonstrating a symbol fluctuation display. 6 is a time chart for explaining a time lag that occurs among the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the hit classification and variation time in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a time chart for explaining the symbol variation display after the jackpot symbol 1 is stopped and the 16R jackpot game is performed in the third embodiment, and (b) is the third embodiment. 5 is a time chart for explaining the symbol variation display and the display state of the hold icon in the decorative symbol display device when the timer number 8 is selected. It is a figure which shows the modification of the table set shown in FIG. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment from the front. It is a figure which shows the example in which a shaking stop display is performed from a super reach production. It is a figure which shows the example where the shaking stop display was performed from the super reach production and it was a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example in which a shaking stop display is performed from a super reach production and a promotion production is performed. It is a figure which shows the example which performs pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation and becomes a big hit. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 42 and illustrating an example in which the table set 21 is set in the RAM 308 after the jackpot game ends. It is a figure which shows an example when the table set 21 is set to RAM308 and the remaining maximum frequency | count of the symbol fluctuation display in which a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is maintained becomes 50 times or less. It is a figure which shows the example which wins 16R special jackpot in a normal state. FIG. 46 shows a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 45 and shows an example in which the table set 21 is set in the RAM 308 after the jackpot game ends. It is a figure which shows the mode of the 1st special figure display apparatus 212 and the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which can be confirmed with an actual player's eyes. It is the figure which exaggerated and showed the influence by the time lag with the main control part 300 and the sub-control part 400,500 side demonstrated using FIG. It is the figure which exaggerated and showed the influence by the time lag different from the time lag demonstrated using FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the prefetch notice control process of the 1st sub control part 400 in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st prefetch notice and the 2nd prefetch notice in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing seven types of prefetch effects, (b) is a figure showing a modification of the second prefetch notice execution possibility lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (e). It is a figure which shows the example in which there is a prize in a starting port during the design variation display of a special figure, and production A is performed as the first look-ahead notice. It is a figure which shows the example in which there is a prize at the start port during the stop display of the special figure, and the effect D is executed as the second pre-reading notice. It is a figure which shows the example in which there is a prize at the starting port during the symbol variation display of the special figure, and the effect C is executed as the first look-ahead notice. It is a figure which shows the example in which there is a prize at the start opening during the stop display of the special figure, and the effect C is executed as the second prefetch notice. (A) is a state in which the control state is maintained in the first control state while the symbol variation display (special symbol variation game) of the special figure is performed a predetermined number of times after the big hit game is finished. It is a figure which shows the execution degree of the prefetch effect in the example which transfers to the control state of (b), (b) is the figure explaining the 2nd period shown to (a) in detail. It is a figure which shows the example in which multiple types of change look-ahead notice is performed. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, an embodiment (first embodiment) of a first gaming machine of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. To do.
[Embodiment 1]
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk of the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor with ball storage tray 1082 for detecting that the door with ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of the game, the chance button 136 that changes the production mode of the various production devices 206 (see FIG. 2) by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 A chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a player's balance of the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving a return instruction and a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power management unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLumin S3ence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. These ordinary figure display device 210, first special figure display device 212, and second special figure display device 214 correspond to an example of symbol display means. On the other hand, the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 corresponds to an example of effect display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent out to a player may be referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In a state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game balls that enter the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238 and the like. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b simulating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decoration symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of effect display means.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are composed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are: The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be a thing. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) combined. Can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or a single second control means combining the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500 with the main control section 300 as the first control means. Can also be taken.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308. In addition, various data representing predetermined information and the like are stored in the ROM 306 for each address, and when referred to as a table in the following description, a condition for determining which address in the ROM 306 is designated is displayed in a table format. May refer to a summary. The same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes three random value generation circuits). 1), the main body opening sensor 1041, the front frame door sensor 1061, the door sensor with ball storage tray 1082, and the lower tray 128 shown in FIG. Receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a full tank detection sensor, a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and disturbs the result of amplification and comparison with reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the numerical value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a drive circuit for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 24, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the high accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, and the like. ing.

  The main control unit 300 is a game control unit that performs game control, and includes a success / failure determination unit, a start information prefetching unit, and a prior determination unit, which will be described later.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be roughly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to a random value generation circuit. Output to 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the universal start port 228, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the general start port 228. Then, the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the normal start port 228 built in the random value generation circuit 318.

  In addition, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a predetermined prize opening such as a general prize opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, a variable winning opening 234 or the like is won. And a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the normal start port 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and a drive for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224. A circuit 422, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1, an effect movable body sensor 424, and a chance button detection sensor A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from 426 to the basic circuit 402 is connected.

  Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The sub-control unit that combines the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 receives a command signal from the main control unit 300 that is a game control unit, and based on the received command signal, the decorative symbol display device The effect means such as 208 is controlled.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 mainly based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and awards based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. While detecting whether or not the payout of the ball or the rental ball has been completed, communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, the launcher 146 and the launcher motor 632 driving the launcher 148 shown in FIG. The device 634 is controlled.

  The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of a special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the second special figure start port 232 has a ball. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a special figure fluctuation stop display. This special figure variable stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5A shows ten types of special drawings from “special drawing A” to “special drawing J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5 (a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, six types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F") are prepared as the stop pattern modes of special figures. “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure C” is a 2R special jackpot symbol, which is called sudden change. When these symbols (special drawings A and C) are stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol, which is called a sudden reduction. When the special figure B or the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and “Special figure F” is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal. When the special figure E is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. When the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. However, the control state of the normal figure high probability / low probability is the control state when the winning is won (whether it was a special figure high probability state and whether it was a special figure high probability state) and the special figure symbol ( It depends on the stop symbol). For example, when the control state before the big hit game is a low probability state of ordinary figure (regardless of the state of the special figure), “special figure A” to “special figure D” that shift to the common figure high probability state are When it is stopped, after the big hit game is over, it shifts to the usual high probability state. The same applies when the control state before the big hit game is a normal high probability state. On the other hand, if the control state before starting the big hit game is the normal figure high probability state, even if the "special figure E" or "special figure F" that becomes the normal figure low probability state is stopped, Returns to the normal high probability state. In this case, although the big hit is usually drawn in a high probability state, the interest of the game is prevented from deteriorating by avoiding the disadvantage to the player. If the control state before the big hit game is the special figure low probability state and the normal figure low probability state, if the special figure E or the special figure F is stopped, even after the big hit game ends. Although the special figure low probability state is maintained, if the special figure E or special figure F is stopped in the special figure high probability state ordinary figure low probability state, the normal figure high probability state is entered. In addition, “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” may be symbols that are not selected in the special drawing 2 that is mainly drawn in the high-probability state.

  A round means the number of times that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the present embodiment, the number of operations of the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 3 is represented, and the 15th round is defined as one or more opening / closing operations of the variable prize opening 234 (one operation). This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, the specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit or the short time big hit is the difference in the probability of winning the big hit (special big hit or short time big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In this embodiment, during the big hit game, the special figure shifts to a low probability state, and if the special figure A, special figure C, and special figure E are won, the special figure will be displayed until the next big hit after the big hit game ends. A high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the special figure B, special figure D, and special figure F are won, the special figure low probability state remains even after the big hit game ends. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of a first probability control state. In addition, a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends may be referred to as a special figure probability change, and a state where the probability of winning a big jackpot after the jackpot game ends (a special figure high probability state) is a player. Is an example of a second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state. In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a probability control state transition unit.

  In addition, if the special drawings A to D are won, all of them shift to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state) after the big hit game ends. The electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Say. This power support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time-short state. That is, the electric support state (time-short state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/101 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/101 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be long (electric chew releasing period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 is opened three times in the electric support state (for example, 3 to open for 1.7 seconds) Repeatedly, the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chow releases. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the power is supported during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until the predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be entered during a big hit and the number of game balls that can be acquired increases, resulting in an increase in gambling. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, in the second special figure starting port 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is larger in the electric support state over a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when special figure A and special figure C are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) is maintained until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is completed. When the special figure B and the special figure D are stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure variable game is performed 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is finished, and the non-electric support state is displayed at the 101st time. Transition to (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, if a big hit without special support (special figure E, special figure F) is won, it does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. In the non-electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is kept small. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is large, and the entry rate of game balls is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 that is the variable start area at the first approach rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball starts the second special figure start. It enters the mouth 232 at a second approach rate that is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state. The main control unit 300 also performs the transition of the approach rate control state, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of an approach rate control state transition unit.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as small hit symbols in addition to the big hit symbol. The special figure G shown in FIG. 5 (a) is the first small hit symbol, and the special figure H is the second small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 1.5 seconds per operation. In opening the door member 2341 at the small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. As a result, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is opened or closed one or more times, and the player's advantage is relatively high.

  In this embodiment, two types of lost symbols are also prepared. The special figure I shown in FIG. 5 (a) is the first lost symbol, and the special figure J is the second lost symbol. When the lose symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is not opened and closed, and the player's advantage is relatively low. In addition, a losing symbol other than “special symbol I” and “special symbol J” (for example, a third losing symbol or the like) may be prepared. In this embodiment, the losing symbol includes a plurality of types of symbols. It is a waste.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the hit control state (the big hit control state and the small hit control state) of the second advantage that the player's advantage is high, and the second advantage. A loss control state (corresponding to an example of a normal control state) having a first advantage with a low advantage is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 has a hit control state (first control state) and a loss control state (second control). The control state of any one of (state) is taken. The transition of the control state is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a control state transition unit.

  In addition, the jackpot includes a jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player and a jackpot that is relatively disadvantageous. In terms of the number of rounds, 15R special jackpot (Special Figure A) and 15R jackpot (Special Figure B) correspond to advantageous jackpots, and 2R series jackpots (Special Figure C to Special Figure F) correspond to disadvantageous jackpots. . Also, if you see whether or not there is a probability change, 15R special big hit (Special Figure A), sudden probability change (Special Figure C), and hidden probability change (Special Figure E) correspond to advantageous big hits, 15R big hit (Special Figure B) Sudden time reduction (Special Figure D) and sudden normal (Special Figure F) correspond to disadvantageous jackpots. The jackpot success / failure determination result that is relatively advantageous to these players corresponds to an example of a specific success / failure determination result. The control state shifts to a big hit control state that is relatively advantageous to the player.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “special symbol A” are prepared as the jackpot symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as the jackpot symbol 2.

  The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are notifying means for informing the determination result (lottery result), and the pattern mode ( The symbol variation display until the special drawings A to J) are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect) which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot, or “Special Figure C”, which is a 2R special jackpot, three “odd” decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination 2 ”(for example,“ decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3 ”,“ decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5 ”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. When notifying “Special Figure B” which is a 15R jackpot, “decoration pattern combination 1” (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 2— “Decoration 2”, “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying “special drawing E” that is a hidden probability change, “special drawing F” that is suddenly normal, “special drawing G” and “special drawing H” that are small hits, the symbol display area 208a. ˜208c, “decoration pattern combination 3” such as “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and “special drawing C” that is suddenly probable or “special drawing D” that is suddenly shortened is notified. In this case, “decorative symbol combination 4” such as “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, when notifying “special drawing I” and “special drawing J” that are lost, decorative symbols other than “decorative symbol combination 1” to “decorative symbol combination 4” are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination (for example, loose eye) is stopped and displayed. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of this “decorative symbol variable display” until the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol (for example, “decorative symbol combination 2”) is stopped are displayed. Sometimes referred to as symbol change stop display.

  In addition, the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 5A) of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 and the stop of one decorative symbol displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative pattern (see FIG. 10B) is larger in the design (see FIG. 10B).

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (2nd symbol mode). In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general diagram B” which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the following, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the usual figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern form of the usual figure may be referred to as a usual figure change stop display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of auxiliary symbol notification means.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 has a special jackpot special random number counter, a small bonus special figure 1 random counter, a lost special figure 1 random number counter, and a counter for these counters for the special figure 2. Is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores the number of reservations shown in FIG. 1, the special figure 1 winning random value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 1 success / failure. The determination result, the special figure 1 determination result, the special figure 1 variation time, and the retention number, random value, and result for special figure 2 are stored. In addition, the RAM 308 has separate storage units that are divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery), separately for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Yes. As will be described later, the special-purpose 1 winning random number value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure, as will be described later, One random number value for determining one variation time is set as one set, and the five random number values are stored for each area in a winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, 4 for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter, the big hit special figure random value counter, the small hit special figure random value counter, and the lose special figure random value counter, respectively. Three initial value generation random number counters and three random number counters for generating the normal timer random number value, the special figure 1 variation time determination random value, and the special figure 2 variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random numbers is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 234, 230 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Special-purpose timer random number, special jackpot special figure 1 random value, small bonus special figure 1 random value, lost special figure 1 random value, special figure 1 variation time determining random value, big hit special figure 2 random value, small hit The random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value, the special figure 2 random value for losing, and the random value for determining the special figure 2 variation time is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random value related to the special figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value related to the special figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning holes 234, 230 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of special figure 1 variable games that are on hold (the number of holdings of special figure 1) is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment). If this is the case, predetermined start-up information is acquired. That is, in this case, the hold condition is satisfied, and the special figure 1 winning random number value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 1 variation time Get random number for decision. The special figure 1 winning random value acquired here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (a value of hardware random number + a value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 1 variation time determining random value are derived from a software random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by processing the software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing generates and derives start information, and start information deriving means This corresponds to an example of (first start information deriving means, second start information deriving means). The various random number values (starting information) acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of FIG. The The reserved storage unit of FIG. 1 stores the start information acquired when a game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 (first start area) up to a predetermined first upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to the first start information storage means that can be stored. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. The first start-up information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage section and the temporary area shown in FIG. 1 may be used as the first start-up information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 1 stored in the RAM 308, and the number of holdings in FIG. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  As for special figure 2, each random value which is starting information is acquired similarly to special figure 1, and the acquired random number value is similarly stored as a set of starting information in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308. In addition, 1 is added to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM 308. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 stores the start information acquired when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 (second start area) up to a predetermined second upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to a possible second starting information storage means. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 may be used as the second start-up information storage unit, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area shown in FIG. Further, the start information storage means may be a register of the CPU 304.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 holds the operation of the symbol display means (the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214) when the holding condition is satisfied. Is at least executable.

  In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the general map start port 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment), the general map at that timing is used. The value of the random number counter for generating the winning random number is acquired as the starting winning random number value which is the starting information, and stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 different from that for the special drawing. In this winning acceptance process, a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a winning (winning) at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, or the variable winning port 234. In such a case, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the winnings of the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. ) Is set to receive winning information.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the start information is not acquired and the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after the conversion processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the opening control of the pair of blade members 2321 in this way corresponds to an example of a variable start region control unit that performs variable start region control. On the other hand, if it is in the non-electric support state, in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal operation is not set, and no signal is sent to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232. Is not output. By doing so, the blade member 2321 remains closed. Note that a signal for maintaining the blade member 2321 in the closed state may be output without fail.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 0.1 second), a signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321, and the valve is closed in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area, set “Normal” inactive. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  Subsequently, in the step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is executed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and a plurality of variable times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. This special figure prefetch process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225), Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a control unit capable of executing at least control of the symbol display unit (the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first loss flag, second loss flag, probability change flag, and hourly flag. Is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the special figure in the special figure related lottery process to be described later Based on the determination result (stop pattern mode of the special figure), the 7 segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set to represent. By carrying out this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the second lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is turned off during the big hit game or the small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (second control state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S233) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 2341 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command big prize opening setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 2341 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing change control of the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit gaming state. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful from the ROM 306. Get the open / close pattern.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. When the probability variation flag is set to ON, it is in a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit after the big hit game is high (a special figure high probability state). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is not set to ON (set to OFF), it is a special figure low probability state. Therefore, the setting state of the probability variation flag affects the result of the determination of success / failure (special drawing lottery). In addition, when the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state, the electric chew is easy to open (for example, easy to hit), the opening time based on one hit is long, and the number of times of opening based on one hit is large. The variable starting area control is performed so as to be advantageous to the player. On the contrary, if the time reduction flag is set to OFF, it is in a non-electric support state, and the variable start area control is performed so as to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the setting state of the time reduction flag also affects the variable start area control. Therefore, information indicating the setting state of the probability variation flag and / or the time reduction flag corresponds to an example of game control information, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control information determination means.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in steps S225 and S227 is completed, special figure-related lottery processes (steps S229 and S231) for special figure 1 and special figure 2 respectively are performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. The main control unit 300 first performs the process for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229)), and then performs the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)). Do. As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 at the same timing. The start information is acquired and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special figure start port 232, the special condition 2 variable game start conditions, and the special figure 1 variable game start. Even if the conditions are satisfied at the same time, or if both the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 variable game start condition are satisfied, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Figure 1 Floating game does not start to fluctuate. That is, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs special figure 2 priority fluctuation, and the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure start port 232 (determination of special figure 2) is determined as the first special figure start. This is prioritized over a lottery based on winning a prize in the mouth 230 (a determination of success / failure in FIG. 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first special start area, the random number value is stored in the first random number storage area up to the maximum hold number, and the second special start area In the case where a game ball is won, the winning random number storage area stores up to the maximum number of reserved random numbers in the second random number value storage area, and both the first random number value storage area and the second random number value storage area When a random number value is stored, the random number value is stored in the first random value storage area and the random number value is stored in the second random value storage area regardless of the stored random number value. The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the second random value storage area, the random value is not stored in the first random value storage area, and the second random value storage area If a random value is stored in the second random number A determination is made based on the random number value stored in the value storage area, no random value is stored in the second random value storage area, and a random value is stored in the first random value storage area. In the case where it is determined, a determination unit is provided for determining whether or not it is correct based on the random number value stored in the first random value storage area. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. Based on the determination result, the start information of FIG. 1 is used as the start information in which the determination result is not performed. In the state where only the start information of the special figure 1 of the start information of the special figure 2 remains, and the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored, the newly stored start of the special figure 2 The notification of the result of the determination based on the information is performed prior to the notification of the result of the determination based on the startup information of FIG. Further, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information, when start information is stored in both of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the second start information When starting information is acquired from the storage means and the starting information is stored in one of the first starting information storing means and the second starting information storing means, the starting information is stored. The starting information is obtained from the information storage means. It should be noted that the special figure 2 related lottery process is performed first after the special figure 2 state update process of step S225, and then the special figure 1 state update process of step S227 is performed, and then the special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. It may be.

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process at step S229, the execution of the success / failure determination (lottery) for the special figure 2, determination of the special figure to be stopped and determination of the variation time are performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. In the special figure 2 related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. This predetermined condition corresponds to an example of a symbol variation condition. In this determination, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. That is, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is displaying the special figure variation or the stop display, and if any one is being displayed, the main controller timer interrupt processing is performed. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt Returning to the process, if the special figure is not in operation, it is determined that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. The determination as to whether or not the game is successful is determined by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable game held is larger than zero. If the hold number is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and the start information stored most recently from the holding storage unit of FIG. Random values for the set (Special Figure 2 Winning Random Value, Special Bonus Figure 2 Random Value, Small Bonus Special Figure 2 Random Value, Loss Special Figure 2 Random Value, and Special Figure 2 Variation Time Random Value) The start information (a set of random values) that is acquired and still stored in the hold storage unit is transferred from the area currently stored to the adjacent area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values (special figure 2 winning random number value, big hit special figure 2 random value, small hit special figure 2 random value, lost special figure 2 random value, The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the process of acquiring the special figure 2 variable time determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start information acquisition unit.

  FIG. 8A is a diagram illustrating a high probability table for determination of success / failure, and FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating a low probability table for determination of success / failure. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 retrieves the start information from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308, the CPU 304 refers to the probability variation flag. If the probability variation flag is on, the special diagram high probability state is obtained. The numerical value range 0 to 65535) is based on which random number range in the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. Or, “losing” is derived. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, it is in the special figure low probability state. Therefore, based on which random number range in the special figure 2 winning random number value shown in FIG. Then, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” is derived as the special figure 2 determination result. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” corresponds to determination of success / failure.

  Next, the symbol of the special figure 2 is determined based on the special figure 2 determination result.

  FIG. 8C shows a special figure determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure determination table, a random number range corresponding to a stop symbol form of the special figure (see FIG. 5A) is defined for each success / failure determination result.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, if the special figure 2 determination result is a big hit, the special figure 2 random number value for big hit (taken out of one set of random values previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308. The numerical value range to be obtained is 0 to 99), and it is determined which random number range of the jackpot the result of the success / failure determination in the special figure determination table shown in FIG. “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” are determined. Also, if the special figure 2 win / fail determination result is a small hit, the special figure 2 random number value for small hits (a possible numerical range is one of the random values for one set previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308) 0 to 99) determines which random number range of the small hits in the special figure determination table shown in (c) of FIG. G "or" Special Figure H "is determined. Furthermore, if the special figure 2 determination result is a loss, the special figure 2 random number value for lost out of one set of random values previously obtained from the storage unit of the RAM 308 (possible numerical range is 0 to 99) determines to which random number range out of the losses the decision result in the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 10C belongs, and the special figure 2 determination result is “special figure I” or Determine “Special Figure J”. The special figure 2 decision result decided here is information representing the symbol form of special figure 2 to be stopped and displayed by the second special figure display device 214.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation time (special diagram 2 variation time) in the symbol variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined based on the special diagram 2 determination result. For the determination of the variation time here, a special figure 2 variation time determination random value (a possible numerical range is 0 to 65535) out of one set of random values previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308 is used. It is done.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a special figure 2 variation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 2 variable time determination table is composed of tables 1 to 5, and table 1 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a jackpot symbol (special figures A and B) of 15R. Yes, Table 2 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a 2R big hit symbol (Special C to F) or a small hit symbol (Special G, H). Tables 3 to 5 are This is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a lost symbol (Special Figure I, J).

  Each table of Tables 1 to 5 defines a correspondence relationship between the variation time and the random number selection range of the special figure 2 variation time determination random value. In addition, in each table shown in FIG. 9A, the name of the variation pattern representing the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to each variation time is also shown for reference. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated one-to-one. The main control unit 300 may determine the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the variation time of the special figure, but in the present embodiment, information representing the variation time determined here is the first sub-information. It transmits to the control part 400, and the 1st sub control part 400 determines the production | presentation aspect in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 corresponding to change time. In this embodiment, ten types of variation patterns are prepared. These fluctuation patterns include a fluctuation pattern with a reach effect and a change pattern without a reach effect. In the present embodiment, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B are prepared as reach effects. In normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are displayed in the same manner, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is stopped. If the symbol display area that is variably displayed (reach state), that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed stops displaying a specific symbol (the symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped), the predetermined jackpot symbol This is a state in which the combination (“decorative symbol combination 1” or “decorative symbol combination 2” shown in FIG. 5B) is stopped and displayed.

  Super Reach A (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “reach A”) and Super Reach B (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “reach B”) are produced by adding special variation display to normal reach. It is a kind of reach that improves the effect.

  In addition, long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, and the like are known as super reach, and special reach such as special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like are also known. In the present specification, the term “reach” means a variation of the decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special reach. This reach is an effect of notifying the player after the success / failure determination and notifying the result of the success / failure determination that the result of the special determination's success / failure determination (lottery) will be the winning determination result. Thus, whether or not to perform reach is determined after determining whether or not to reach. In the case of no reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively short, in the super reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively long, and in the normal reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is the time between no reach and the super reach.

  When the special figure 2 determination result is special figure A or special figure B (see Table 1), both are 15R jackpot symbols with electric support, and as shown in Table 1, the longest fluctuation time of 65 seconds Is most likely to be selected, and the fluctuating time of 15 seconds is the least likely to be selected. In this case, reach design is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and if the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed to Super Reach B, the possibility of 15R big hit becomes high. There is a possibility of a big hit. That is, Super Reach B and Super Reach A are reach modes in which the reliability of 15R jackpot is higher than other reach modes.

  If the special figure 2 decision result is a 2R big hit symbol (Special Fig. C to F) or a small hit symbol (Special G, H) (see Table 2), the fluctuation time is uniformly 12 seconds. To be elected. In this case, the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily turns off the decorative symbol combination (decorative symbol combination 3, decorative symbol combination 4) that is stopped and displayed after fluctuation without reach, so-called chance all-off. Done.

  When the determination result of the special figure 2 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the table used differs depending on whether or not it is in the electric support state and the number of reservations in the special figure 2. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines a table to be used with reference to the time reduction flag and the number of suspensions in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM 308.

  If the determination result of the special figure 2 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J) and the support status is 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 1 to 3, the table 3 is used. In this case, it is in the electric support state, and in order to speed up the digestion of the special figure 2, the shortest fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is uniformly selected. Will be done.

  Table 4 is used when the determination result of special figure 2 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the support status is zero, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is zero. In this case, in order to save the special figure 2 hold, the fluctuation time of 8 seconds, which is somewhat longer, is uniformly selected, and the decorative design display device 208 does not perform the reach effect.

  When the special figure 2 determination result is a losing symbol (special figure I, J) and the non-electric support state, the table 5 is used regardless of the number of holdings in the special figure 2. In the non-electric support state, if there is a prize at the second special figure starting port 232, it is a rare case that the normal figure variable game was won in the low probability state of the normal figure, In the state where the special figure 1 variable game is continuously performed, the special figure 2 variable game is interrupted and preferentially digested. In this case, the fluctuation time of 8 seconds (losing without reach) is selected with a high probability, as shown in Table 5, without shortening or extremely shortening the fluctuation time of FIG. However, a variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds may be selected. When the variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a reach effect.

  As described above, the special figure 2 variation time is determined, and the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) is ended.

  Subsequently, special drawing 1 related lottery processing (step S231) is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is read as “special figure 1”. That is, in the special figure 1 related lottery process, one set of random values (the special figure 1 winning random number value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 of the RAM 308) , Special figure 1 random value for losing, and random number value for determining special figure 1 variation time) are obtained, and based on one set of random values (starting information), whether or not to determine whether or not special figure 1 is true (lottery) Determines the special figure to be executed and stopped, and the change time. The execution determination is performed using the determination table shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, and the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 8C is used to determine the special figure. For the determination of the variation time, a variation time determination table shown in FIG. 9B is used.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram showing the special figure 1 variation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 1 variation time determination table is composed of tables 6 to 9, and the table 6 is a table used when the special figure 1 decision result is a 15R jackpot symbol (special figures A and B). The contents are the same as the contents of the table 1 shown in FIG. The table 7 is a table used when the special figure 1 determination result is a 2R big hit symbol (Special Drawings C to F) or a small hit symbol (Special Drawings G and H). The content is the same as the content of the table 2 shown.

  Tables 8 and 9 are tables used when the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figures I and J). Even when the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the table used differs depending on whether or not it is in the electric support state and the number of holdings in the special figure 1.

  When the determination result of the special figure 1 is a losing symbol (special figures I and J), the non-electric support state and the holding number of the special figure 1 is 3, the table 8 is used. In this case, in order to expedite digestion of the special figure 1, there is a high probability that a short variation time of 3 seconds is selected, and when the variation time of 3 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a reach effect. Instead, a shortened change will be made.

  When special figure 1 decision result is losing design (special figure I, J) and non-electric support state and special figure 1 hold number is 0-2 or electric support state (the hold number is irrelevant) For this, the table 9 is used. This table 9 has the same contents as the contents of the table 5 shown in FIG.

  In step S233, which is performed following the special drawing 1 related lottery process in step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, per round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, special figure. Bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and the special symbol variation time. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (result of determining a special symbol), information indicating a control state, and the like, a winning effect start command and an end effect start are included. In the case of a command, information indicating a control state is included, and in the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating a control state, a per-round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information representing the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information representing the control state, and information representing the special figure variation time stored in the RAM 308 as command data. The information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is on hold is set.

  In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state that are stored in the RAM 308 and are output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the winning effect start command transmits a winning effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the winning effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the winning effect control command causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started for a predetermined opening effect period (for example, 3 seconds), The jackpot game starts.

  In the above-described general command end effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for informing the player that the big hit is to be ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). finish.

  In the general command big prize opening release transmission process described above, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the command data, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation held. Information indicating the number of games is set.

  In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. This general command special figure pending increase processing is step S215 in the same timer interruption processing as the timer interruption processing of the winning acceptance processing that acquired the starting information when the starting information was acquired in the previous winning acceptance processing (step S217). Is executed. In the general command special figure hold increasing process, the special figure identification information (information shown in FIG. 1 or 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is added to the command data of the special figure hold increasing command, and the control state is set. Information to be displayed and information of special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance (stopped symbol information or undetermined information described later) are set.

  Furthermore, in this step S215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 start (do) the common figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the normal figure has stopped (do) or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7, an external output signal setting process (step S235) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the above-described step 205 are read, and the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or a bottom pan full error is monitored. When the lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether or not there is a glass frame opening error or lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and the normal symbol display device 210, the first symbol is displayed via the driving circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on in order to determine whether or not a power supply interruption (power interruption) has been detected. Then, when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. When the low voltage signal is on (when the power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and processing at power-off such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
The process of the 1st sub control part 400 is demonstrated using FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting in step S301 is executed. In this initial setting, initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 4, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In this command processing, power recovery sub-side flag setting processing and the like are performed, and details will be described later.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In this effect control process, a start-side winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process, a change start sub-side notice execution process, and a power recovery sub-side flag setting process are also performed. Each of these processes will be described later in detail.

  In step S311, when the pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315, if there is a command to the drive circuit 420 for the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S317, if there is a command to the drive circuit 422 of the effect movable body 224 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S319, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and the command reception interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S341 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like. Ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
The second sub control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. This image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display the display image. The generated image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the GPU attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Subsequently, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When a generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1) to finish the process. To do.

  Further, the second sub control unit 500 also executes control of the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.

<Special figure look-ahead processing>
Next, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 11A is a flowchart showing a flow of special figure prefetching processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300.

  First, in step S224a, whether or not the start information of special figure 2 has increased, that is, the start information (one set of random values) for special figure 2 is added to the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308. If it has increased (if it has been added), the start information of the special figure 2 that has been increased is pre-read and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 is pre-determined (step S224b). In this step S224b, first, the starting information of FIG. 2 is prefetched from the holding storage unit of FIG. That is, with the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 as a trigger, the starting information generated based on the winning is prefetched. Therefore, the start information is prefetched before the start information is acquired in the determination of validity (the special drawing 2 related lottery process in step S229 shown in FIG. 7). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this prefetching corresponds to an example of start information prefetching means. Here, the starting information of FIG. 2 is pre-read from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, but the starting information of FIG. 2 may be pre-read from an area other than the holding storage unit of FIG. In addition, for example, in the winning acceptance process, the start information is stored in the register of the CPU 304 in addition to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 prepared in the RAM 308, and the RAM 308 is determined when determining whether or not the special figure 2 related lottery process is successful. Alternatively, the start information may be acquired from one of the registers of the CPU 304 and the start information may be acquired from the other at the time of prefetching. Furthermore, prefetching here prefetches only the winning portion (holding increment), but all may be prefetched.

  Note that pre-reading here means that the start information is read first before the validity determination (final lottery), but in the following explanation, the word “prefetching” is referred to as the result of the pre-judgment (final lottery). ) May be used to mean read.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-determination high probability table having the same contents as the contents of the success / failure determination high probability table shown in FIG. 8A and a success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. A pre-determination low probability table having the same contents as the contents and a special figure pre-determination table having the same contents as the contents of the special figure determining table shown in FIG.

  When the start information is prefetched, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 pre-determines whether or not the result is determined in the future special drawing 2 related lottery process and the symbols to be stopped based on the preread start information. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 first refers to the probability variation flag, selects one of the high probability table for preliminary determination and the low probability table for preliminary determination, and uses the selected table, Based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the pre-read start information, whether the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit / no-go determination result, a small hit / no-go determination result, or a lose / fail determination result Is determined in advance. That is, whether or not the winning / failing determination result based on the starting information generated based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 becomes the big hit determination result (specific winning / failing determination result). It is determined in advance. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this pre-determination corresponds to an example of a pre-determination unit, and the result of the pre-determination here is treated as a special figure 2 determination result.

  Next, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the special figure predetermination table to make a predetermination of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol in accordance with the special figure 2 determination result. That is, if the special figure 2 win / failure pre-judgment result is a big hit, based on the big hit special figure 2 random number value in the pre-read start information, the big hit symbol to be a stop symbol is pre-determined, and the special figure 2. When the result of the prior / no-go determination is a small hit, the small hit symbol as a stop symbol is determined in advance based on the random number value for the special hit 2 in the pre-read start information. If the result of the preliminary determination is a loss, a preliminary determination of a lost symbol as a stop symbol is performed based on the special figure 2 random number for loss in the pre-read start information. The pre-determination of the special figure here is also executed before the success / failure determination (the special drawing 2 related lottery process) based on the pre-read start information is performed, and the result of the pre-determination here is treated as the special figure 2 pre-determination result. . Note that the big hit symbol pre-determination is equivalent to pre-determining which type of big hit is available, and the same is true for the small-hit symbol pre-determination and the loss symbol pre-determination. It is.

  In step S224c following step S224b, the stop symbol information (special figure 2 preliminary determination result) of special figure 2 obtained in step S224b is stored in the special figure 2 preliminary determination result storage area prepared in RAM 308, and in step S224d. move on.

  On the other hand, if the start information in FIG. 2 has not increased in the determination in step S224a, the process proceeds to step S224d, and pre-reading and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 2 are not performed.

  In step S224d, this time, it is determined whether or not there has been an increase in the starting information of Special Figure 1, that is, whether or not a set of random values has been added to the reserved storage unit of Special Figure 1 provided in RAM 308. If it has been added (if it has been added), it is determined whether or not it is in a big hit gaming state (step S224e). If it is not in the big hit game, it is determined whether or not the current control state is the electric support state with reference to the time-short flag prepared in the RAM 308 (step S224f). If it is in the support state (if the time reduction flag is in the OFF state), the process proceeds to step S224g.

  In step S224g, as in step S224b described above, first, the start information of special figure 1 is prefetched from the holding storage unit of special figure 1. Next, as in step S224b, a special figure 1 hit / fail judgment result is obtained based on the pre-read start information. Subsequently, as in step S224b, the special figure 1 preliminary determination result is acquired in accordance with the special figure 1 success / failure preliminary determination result.

  In step S224h subsequent to step S224g, the stop symbol information (special figure 1 preliminary determination result) of special figure 1 obtained in step S224g is stored in the special chart 1 preliminary determination result storage area prepared in the RAM 308, and is shown in FIG. Return to the indicated main controller timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating an example in which the advance determination information is stored in the advance determination result storage area prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), the special figure 1 pre-determination result storage area 3081 and the special figure 2 pre-determination result storage area 3082 are both divided into four areas according to the maximum number of holdings. In the four areas in the classified special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area 3081, the stop symbol information (special figure 1 preliminary determination result) of special figure preliminarily determined in step S224g is stored. Similarly, the four symbols in the special figure 2 pre-determination result storage area 3082 are stored with the stop symbol information (special figure 2 pre-determination result) of special figure pre-determined in step S224b. In the example shown in FIG. 11 (b), the special figure 1 pre-determination result storage area 3081 stores information for four holds, and the 15R special is stored in the area corresponding to the newest hold (hold 4). Information representing the jackpot special figure A is stored, and the remaining three areas (holdings 1 to 3) store information representing the special figure of the loss (special figure I or special figure J). Further, the example shown in FIG. 11B is an example in a non-electric support state, and no special figure 2 preliminary determination result is stored in the special figure 2 preliminary determination result storage area 3082.

In the pre-reading process shown in FIG. 11A, only the stop determination of the special figure is performed in advance. However, based on the random number value for determining the special figure change time in the pre-read start information, It may be performed up to the prior determination of the variation time, and the prior determination result of the variation time (special figure variation time prior determination result) may be stored in the prior determination result storage area. Further, instead of the variation time, the effect mode (variation pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be determined in advance. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated one-to-one, and the fact that the variation time is selected means that the variation pattern is selected. You can also see it. Further, the production modes may be divided into groups, and for example, only the group of “out of reach / normal reach lose” or the group of “reach A out of reach / reach B lose” may be selected. Or, it belongs to the group of directing “per normal reach, normal reach lose, per reach A, per reach B, per reach A, per reach B”, or “super shortened lose, shortened lose, lose, chance all extinguished” Predetermination information (information indicating the special figure predetermination result) newly stored in the predetermination result storage area of the RAM 308 may be preliminarily determined as to whether it belongs to the group without reach. Alternatively, it is included in the command data of the special figure hold increase command as information of the special figure 2, and is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. That is, in step S215 in the same timer interrupt process as the special figure prefetch process (step S224) in which the prior determination information is newly stored, the first determination newly stored in the first sub-control unit 400 is performed. Information is transmitted.

  On the other hand, if the start information in FIG. 1 has not increased in the determination in step S224d, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7, and pre-reading and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 1 are not performed. Further, even when the big hit game is being played in step S224e and when the current control state is the electric support state (the time reduction flag is on), the pre-reading and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 1 are not performed. In these cases, “undecided” information indicating that the determination of success / failure based on the start information of the special figure 1 increased this time and the preliminary determination of the stop symbol is not performed is stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area. Store (step S224i) and return to the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In this embodiment, if the undetermined information setting condition (in this case, during the big hit game or in the electric support state) is satisfied, the start-up information itself is not pre-read, but pre-read is performed and pre-determination is performed. There may be a mode in which pre-reading and pre-determination are performed, but the result may not be sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400.

  After executing the special figure prefetching process described above, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure related lottery process (steps S229 and S231), and the same start information as the prefetched start information targeted by the special figure prefetch process. The special figure determination result, the special figure determination result, and the fluctuation time of the special figure are obtained anew.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 300 obtains the special figure advance determination result, but the main control unit 300 obtains the pre-read start information as a special figure pending increase command command without obtaining the special figure advance determination result. The first sub control unit 400 may be included in the data and transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 may obtain a special figure preliminary determination result as necessary.

<Pre-reading notice control process>
Next, the prefetch notice control process executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the flow of the prefetch notice control process.

  The prefetch notice control process shown in FIG. 12 is a routine process executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process. First, in step S3091a, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether new hold information has been sent from the main control unit 300. That is, it is determined whether or not a new special figure hold increase command has been received. If it has been received, it is determined whether or not the current state is that the symbol is stopped (step S3091b). In the present embodiment, a symbol stop flag is prepared in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400. When the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol stop command from the main control unit 300, it turns on the symbol stop flag. The symbol stop flag that is turned on is turned off when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning effect start command or a symbol variation start command. Therefore, the symbol stop flag remains on until the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol stop command or the symbol variation start command after receiving the symbol stop command. In the determination in step S3091b, it is determined whether or not the symbol stop flag is on. If it is off, the symbol is not stopped, and in step S3091c, a prefetch notice execution lottery is performed.

  Although the symbol stopping flag is used here, the determination in step S3091b may be performed using a changing flag indicating that the symbol is changing.

  In the present embodiment, a special figure 1 hold display area is provided on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special figure 2 hold display area is provided on the right side thereof. An area of the effect display area 208d that combines the special figure 1 hold display area and the special figure 2 hold display area corresponds to an example of the second display area. In the special figure 1 hold display area, a hold display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the hold storage section of the special figure 1 is displayed in the order in which the start information is stored in the hold storage section of the special figure 1 (winnings). In order) from the oldest to the left. The hold display is a display indicating that the start information is stored or stored in the start information storage means (the special storage section of the RAM 308). In the special figure 2 hold display area, a hold display corresponding to a set of start information stored in the hold storage section of the special figure 2 is displayed in the order in which the start information is stored in the hold storage section of the special figure 2 (winnings). In order) from the oldest to the left. That is, the hold display is performed for each start information stored in the start information storage means, and the number of hold displays corresponds to the hold number. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a start hold display unit. In this embodiment, the default display mode in the hold display is a mode in which a round graphic is displayed without any pattern and in one color, and corresponds to an example of the first mode. Each time the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a hold increase command to the second sub control unit 500, and the second sub control unit 500 performs the decoration based on the hold increase command. The symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of pending displays by one. On the other hand, every time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command that is a signal for the detention, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a hold decrease signal to the second sub-control unit 500. Based on the signal, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to decrease the number of the hold display by one.

  FIG. 13A is a diagram showing types of prefetching notices in the present embodiment.

  The pre-reading notice in the present embodiment is an effect for giving a notice that there is a possibility that the result of the determination as to whether or not the lottery is performed in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) shown in FIG. This corresponds to an example of a notice in the invention. More specifically, in this embodiment, the jackpot is also disadvantageous relative to the jackpot relatively advantageous to the player (for example, 15R special jackpot: special figure A, 15R jackpot: special figure B). Big hits (for example, 2R series big hits: special figure C to special figure F) are prepared, and the pre-reading notice is an effect for giving a notice that there is a possibility of an advantageous big hit. Note that, even in the 2R series big hit, the big hit with certainty (Special Figure C, Special Figure E) may be an advantageous big hit. Further, the pre-reading notice in the present embodiment is a notice made based on the start information (pre-read start information) acquired before the start information is acquired in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S229 and S231). . That is, the pre-reading notice is performed based on a pre-determination result based on the pre-read start information.

  In addition, the prefetching notice here includes a false prefetching notice that falsely notices as if it is an advantageous jackpot even if the pre-determination result is not an advantageous jackpot. In other words, the pre-reading notice indicates that the result of the success / failure determination may be an advantageous jackpot, is a notice that suggests to the player, or that the result of the determination is an advantageous jackpot. It can be said that it is a notice to expect.

  Furthermore, the advance notice according to the present invention may notify information such as “If you win, it will be 2400 shots” or “If you win, you have 15 (15R) chances”. In addition, it may be notified that there is a possibility of losing.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice using the hold display is performed by changing the display mode of the hold display. The pre-reading notice using the hold display has an execution start timing when winning, and the execution area includes the special figure 1 hold display area and the special figure 2 hold display area of the effect display area 208d in the decorative symbol display device 208. Area (second display area). If there is a prize with 0 on hold, the winning / no-go decision based on the prize will be made immediately, and the special symbol variation display will also be started immediately, so the hold display based on the prize will be performed. Although it is possible that there is not, it may be performed for a few seconds immediately after the symbol variation display based on the winning is started. In this case, the effect of the pre-reading notice is performed during the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the pre-read start information) for notifying the success / failure determination result based on the pre-read start information. The display mode using the hold display corresponds to an example of a predetermined mode, and the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a notice unit.

  In addition, by driving the shielding device 246, a pre-reading notice is also made by the actuating of the accessory. The pre-reading advance notice by this actuating operation is when the execution start timing is when the symbol fluctuation is stopped, and the execution area is an area closer to the player than the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation stop time in the pre-reading notice is when at least one of the symbol variation display corresponding to the pre-read start information and the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display is stopped. More specifically, if there is a winning with a hold of 0, the winning / failing determination based on the winning is immediately performed, and the special symbol variation display is also immediately started. When the symbol variation display corresponding to the information is stopped, the execution of the prefetch notice is started.

  Further, the pre-reading notice is also performed by causing a design such as a specific character or symbol to appear on the decorative design display device 208. The execution start timing of the pre-reading notice using this specific symbol is during the symbol variation display started by the symbol variation start command after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first symbol variation start command after winning. Therefore, if there is a win with the hold being 0, the success / failure determination based on the winning is performed immediately, and the special symbol variation display is started immediately. The symbol variation display after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation display (design variation display corresponding to the pre-read start information) for notifying the result is started. When there is a winning in a state where the hold is 1 or more, the symbol variation display is performed before the symbol variation display. The execution areas are a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, and a right symbol display area 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208. Hereinafter, an area obtained by combining these areas 208a to 208c is referred to as a first display area. The first display area is wider than the second display area including the special figure 1 hold display area and the special figure 2 hold display area. A display mode using a specific design may be an example of a predetermined mode.

  Furthermore, pre-reading notices are also made by changing the color and brightness of decorative designs. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice is performed in a blackout manner in which the decorative design is displayed in black. In the pre-reading notice using the decorative design blackout, the execution start timing is when the symbol change is stopped, and the execution area is the first display area.

  Note that the pre-reading notice is not limited to a notice using an image or an accessory, but may be a notice using sound or light. Further, the notice mode of the pre-reading notice, the execution start timing, and the execution area are not limited to the combinations shown in FIG. 13A, and may be combined as appropriate.

  In the lottery for whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed in step S3091c shown in FIG. 12, the pre-reading notice using the hold display, the pre-reading notice using the actuating action, the pre-reading notice using a specific symbol, and the pre-reading notice using a blackout of a decorative symbol A lottery for whether or not each pre-reading notice is executed is performed. Here, a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a pre-reading notice using a specific symbol and a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a pre-reading notice using a hold display will be described.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram showing one of the lottery tables for whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice using a specific symbol, and FIG. 13C shows one of the lottery tables for whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice using a hold display. FIG.

  The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 acquires four types of dedicated random numbers at the timing of executing step S3091c. In the pre-reading notice availability lottery using a specific symbol, a dedicated random number with a range of 0 to 255 is obtained, and using the pre-reading notice feasibility lottery table using the specific symbol, An executable lottery is performed based on this. The execution possibility lottery table shown in FIG. 13 (b) is a lottery table used when the special figure pre-determination result included in the special figure hold increase command is a losing symbol. This corresponds to the availability lottery table. In addition to this, a lottery table for whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice using a specific symbol is prepared in accordance with a special figure pre-determination result. Each of the execution availability lottery tables is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In the pre-read notice execution availability lottery, the execution availability lottery table to be used is selected based on the special figure advance determination result included in the special figure hold increase command, and the execution availability lottery is performed (hereinafter the same). A random number range for non-execution and execution is defined for each pending number in the lottery table for whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice using a specific symbol. In the execution availability lottery table shown in FIG. 13B, the execution probability is significantly lower than the non-execution probability, and the execution probability is higher as the number of pending is smaller. In the not-shown special drawing pre-determination result is special figure A or special figure B, the 15R jackpot execution lottery table (corresponding to the true prefetch advance execution lottery table), The execution probability is higher than the non-execution probability. Accordingly, the execution probability of the pre-reading notice in the execution possibility lottery table at the time of the big hit is higher than the execution probability of the pre-reading notice in the execution possibility lottery table at the time of losing.

  In the lottery for pre-reading notice using the hold display, a dedicated random number in the range of 0 to 4095 is acquired, and based on the obtained random number using the lottery table for the pre-reading notice using the hold display A lottery for execution is performed. The execution availability lottery table shown in FIG. 13C is also a lottery table used when the special figure pre-determination result included in the special figure pending increase command is a losing symbol. This corresponds to the availability lottery table. In addition to the pre-run announcement execution lottery table using the hold display, a plurality of types of execution lottery tables (for example, an executable lottery table for 15R big hits, etc.) are prepared according to the special figure pre-determination result. Any of the execution availability lottery tables is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In the lottery table for whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice using the hold display, there is no distinction of the number of holds, and a random number range is defined for each notice mode such as the hold effect and the aura effect. In the hold effect, the design of the hold display is determined. Here, the default patternless and one-colored round graphic pattern (-), the face pattern of the frog character, the face pattern of the princess character, or the face pattern of the Tono character is selected.

  FIG. 13D is a diagram showing a hold display in which the face design of the habit character is selected in the hold effect and the aura effect is also performed.

  In the aura effect, it is determined whether or not to add a light aura 2902 representing a state in which light diverges from the symbol of the hold display (in FIG. 13 (d), the face symbol 2901 of the frog character). The color of the light aura 2902 is also determined. In the executable lottery table shown in FIG. 13C, “-” indicates no light aura, “blue” indicates that a blue light aura is added, and “yellow” indicates that a yellow light aura is added. “Red” indicates that a red light aura is added.

  Also in the execution possibility lottery table at the time of the loss shown in FIG. 13C, the execution probability is significantly lower than the non-execution probability. That is, it becomes non-executed with a probability of 3918/4069, and the default hold display is displayed in the second display area. On the other hand, the execution probability is higher than the non-execution probability in the 15R big hit execution availability lottery table (corresponding to the true prefetch advance execution availability lottery table) not shown here. Accordingly, the execution probability of the pre-reading notice in the execution possibility lottery table at the time of the big hit is higher than the execution probability of the pre-reading notice in the execution possibility lottery table at the time of losing.

  It should be noted that no aura production may be performed. In addition, when the special figure pre-determination result is lost, the pre-reading notice execution lottery in step S3091c may not be executed, and the false pre-reading notice may be executed only in the case of a small hit.

  Further, the hold display may be an aspect in which the color, the design, or the shape changes every time the shift display based on the hold is performed. In addition, the hold display may be an aspect in which the color, the design, or the shape changes every time a specific design appears by a prefetch notice using the specific design. In addition, a step-up notice may be involved in the hold display, and as the execution of the symbol variation display based on the hold indicated by the hold display approaches, the color, the design, or the shape that increases the degree of expectation may be gradually changed. .

  In addition, a lottery to perform the pre-reading notice by the actuating of the accessory and the pre-reading notice using the blackout of the decorative design, which is not described here, is similarly performed.

  It should be noted that the four notice modes shown in FIG. 13A may be related to each other. For example, whether or not the pre-reading notice according to a predetermined notice mode can be executed may be determined based on whether or not the pre-reading notice according to another notice mode is executed. Further, when a predetermined number or more types of notification modes are executed among a plurality of types of notification modes, an effect such as confirmation of a big hit may be performed.

  In step S3091d, which is executed following step S3091c shown in FIG. 12, it is determined whether or not there is a winning lottery for pre-reading notice execution. The notice control process ends. On the other hand, if at least one kind of pre-reading notice is selected, the second sub-control unit 500 is instructed to execute the pre-reading notice of the selected type in the selected notice form (step S3091e). The control process ends. Based on the instruction, the second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 or the shielding device 246 at the execution start timing shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208 or the shielding device 246 corresponds to an example of a notice unit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3091a that a new special figure hold increase command has not been received, the prefetch notice control process ends. If the symbol stop flag of the RAM 408 is turned on in the determination in step S3091b, the symbol is stopped, and in this case, the prefetch notice control process is also terminated. Accordingly, even if new start information is acquired while the special symbol is stopped, the pre-reading notice execution lottery (step S3091c) is not performed, and the pre-reading notice is not performed. As a result, the hold display is displayed in the default display mode. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the situation where the player overlooks or difficult to recognize the decorative symbol pattern that is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and to improve the fun of the game. May be possible. It may also be possible to entertain and entertain the expected scene. Further, it is clear that the symbol is changing and the symbol is stopped, and the player's concentration may be sustained. In addition, it may be possible to entertain and entertain while the symbols are changing. Note that the process may not be in time if the production is started at the time of the symbol variation stop weight, but even in such a case, there is no problem according to the present embodiment.

  Note that the pre-reading notice control process described above was a routine process executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process, but in the command setting process (step S307), the special figure hold increase command If it is executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process determined to have received the process, the process of step S3091a becomes unnecessary.

  Subsequently, a specific example of the prefetch notice in the present embodiment will be described. In the following description using a specific example, an example in a non-electric support state is assumed unless otherwise specified. Further, the default hold display is a pattern of a blank and solid gray figure, and a white circle indicates that the hold display is not performed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example in which there is a winning while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is displayed, and the holding is increased.

  In the second display area (208d) of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14A, two default hold displays are displayed for the special figure 1. Hereinafter, the hold display indicating the old hold (hereinafter referred to as hold 1) is referred to as a first hold display 291 and the hold display indicating the new hold (hereinafter referred to as hold 2) is referred to as a second hold display 292. Called. In addition, no hold display about special figure 2 is displayed. FIG. 14A and the like show a special figure 1 display device 212 and a special figure 2 display device 214. The special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 14A performs symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In addition to the 1 symbol variation display, the decorative symbol variation display is performed.

  In FIG. 14B, while the symbol variation display is being performed, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the holding of special figure 1 increases. The hold display representing the increased hold (hereinafter referred to as hold 3) is referred to as a third hold display 293. In the pre-run notice availability lottery based on the start-up information of hold 3, only the pre-run notice (specific symbol display) feasibility lottery using a specific symbol among the four types of pre-read notices shown in FIG. did. As a result, the third hold display 293 is displayed in the default display mode.

  Eventually, the symbol variation display ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 14D, the symbol variation display based on the hold 1 of the special diagram 1 is started, and in the first display area (208a to 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Fluctuation is displayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display based on the hold 1 of the special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 14 (e), the first display area (208a to 208c) is displayed. Is displayed in a large manner so that the crest pattern 2081 as a specific pattern is displayed so as to overlap the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, and a pre-reading notice using the crest pattern 2081 is executed. This prefetching advance notice is a prefetching advance notice based on the starting information of the hold 3.

  The pre-reading notice using the family crest symbol 2081 is terminated before the symbol variation display based on the hold 1 of the special diagram 1 is terminated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The combination of symbols is stopped.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating another example in which there is a winning while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is displayed, and the number of holds increases. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 14 will be described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15, a prefetching notice (specific symbol display) using a specific symbol among the four types of prefetching notices shown in FIG. In addition to the availability determination lottery, the pre-reading notice using the hold display is also won, and as a result, the third hold display 293 is displayed with the face design of the frog character. The light aura 2902 is not added. The hold display 293 of the face pattern of the frog character, which has been displayed here, continues to be displayed without changing the display mode until the hold of the hold display 293 is consumed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15E, the crest character 2081, which is a pre-reading notice based on the start information of the hold display 293 in a state where the hold display 293 of the face design of the frog character is displayed. A pre-reading notice is also performed using. That is, two types of pre-reading notices are executed in duplicate based on the start information of the hold 3, and the hold 3 is regarded as a hold that can be expected very much from the player.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where there is a winning while the special symbol is stopped.

  In the second display area (208d) of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (a), a first hold display 291 and a second hold display 292 for the special figure 1 are displayed. In addition, no hold display about special figure 2 is displayed. Further, FIG. 16A and the like show a special figure 1 display device 212 and a special figure 2 display device 214. In the special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 16A, symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In addition to the 1 symbol variation display, the decorative symbol variation display is performed.

  In FIG. 16B, the symbol variation display ends, and the special symbol I display device 212 shown in FIG. 16B displays the special symbol I stop symbol shown in FIG. On the display device 208, the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped and displayed. In the state where this stop symbol is displayed, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold increases. Since the symbol is stopped here, the pre-reading notice based on the increased hold (hold 3) start information is not executed, and the lottery (step S3091c shown in FIG. 12) is not performed, as shown in FIG. 16 (c). The third hold display 293 is displayed in a default display mode.

  In FIG. 16D, the symbol variation display based on the hold 1 of the special diagram 1 is started, and in the first display area (208a to 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Fluctuation is displayed. In FIG. 5E, a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed as an effect of the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, although the special symbol display device 212 is performing symbol variation display, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs temporary stop display that appears as if the decorative symbol variation display has been stopped. Here, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss, is temporarily stopped. During the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, there is a single ball winning at the first special figure start port 230, and the special figure 1 hold increases. Here, although the decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, it is a temporary stop due to the effect, and in the special figure 1 display device 212, the symbol variation is being displayed. Step S3091c) shown in FIG. 12 is performed, and the pre-reading notice using the hold display is won. As a result, the hold display 294 indicating the hold increased here is the face pattern of the frog character with the light aura 2902 added. Is displayed. By doing so, there are cases where the player can be expected even during temporary display of the lost symbol. In addition, the hold display 294 of the face symbol of the frog character to which the light aura 2902 has been started is displayed without changing the display mode until the hold of the hold display 294 is consumed. to continue.

  In FIG. 16 (f), the decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped is resumed to display the variation display, and then the special figure 1 display device 212 ends the symbol variation display, and the special symbol I shown in FIG. The stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (stop display) (see (g) in the figure). That is, a pseudo-ream is performed.

  And in FIG.16 (h), the symbol fluctuation | variation display based on the holding | maintenance 2 of the special figure 1 is started.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a case where, even in the non-electric support state, the player has won the usual variable game and has won one ball at the second special figure starting port 232.

  In FIG. 17B, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is finished, special symbol I display device 212 shown in FIG. 5A is displayed on special figure 1 display device 212, and decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Shows the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss. During the symbol stop display of this special figure, a pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure start opening 232 is opened by winning the universal figure variation game, and there is a single winning to the second special figure start opening 232, The suspension of Special Figure 2 increases. Since the symbol is also stopped here, the pre-reading notice based on the increased starting information of the special figure 2 is not executed, and the lottery (step S3091c shown in FIG. 12) is not performed, as shown in FIG. 17C. The hold display 295 representing the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed in a default display mode.

  The hold display 295 indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is thus displayed in the second display area (208d), but since it is a special figure 2 priority change machine, the hold of the special figure 2 is immediately digested and the hold. The display 295 also disappears immediately (see FIG. 17D).

  Note that the pre-reading notice advancement lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 in the non-electric support state or the pre-reading notice is not performed uniformly regardless of whether or not the specific timing such as when the symbol fluctuation is stopped. You may do it. Further, pre-reading of starting information based on winning in the second special figure starting port 232 in the non-electric support state, or prior determination based on the pre-reading starting information is not performed uniformly, and the “undecided” information The same handling may be used. Further, in the special figure 2 priority variation machine, when the special figure 1 is on hold and the special figure 2 hold is interrupted, a pre-reading notice based on the start information corresponding to the special figure 2 hold that has been interrupted is given. The information may be non-executed, or may be handled in the same manner as the “undecided” information so that the start information is prefetched and predetermination based on the preread start information is not uniformly performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when “undecided” information is stored in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 pre-determined result storage area of the RAM 308, the start information about the suspension in which the “undetermined” information is stored is stored. The pre-reading notice based on the information is not even performed by lottery, but may not be notified even if the lottery is selected. Further, a hold display indicating a hold in which “undecided” information is stored may be performed in a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode dedicated to “undecided” information).

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a specific example in which a pre-reading notice by a background effect is added to the present embodiment.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, a background image displayed as the “dono zone” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display of the background image itself corresponds to the execution of the prefetch notice.

  In the (I) diagram shown on the left side of FIG. 18, the start information of the hold 2 indicated by the second hold display 292 is pre-read, and the background displayed as the pre-reading notice based on the pre-read start information of the hold 2 is displayed. An image is displayed. This background image continues to be displayed even if the symbol variation display is stopped until the hold 2 is digested, and is the same as the hold display in this respect. In (b) of the (I) diagram, while the special symbol variation display is being performed, there is a single winning at the first special diagram starting port 230, and the retention of the special diagram 1 increases. Here, since the special symbol change display is being performed, the pre-reading notice execution lottery (step S3091c shown in FIG. 12) based on the starting information of the increased holding (holding 3) is performed, and the pre-reading notice using the hold display is performed. As a result, the hold display 293 representing the hold 3 increased here is displayed as a face pattern of a frog character to which a light aura 2902 is added. Therefore, different types (background effect and hold display) of different types of pre-reading notices based on the start information corresponding to different holds (here hold 2 and hold 3) are performed.

  Note that, when a pre-reading notice according to a different type of notice mode or a pre-reading notice according to a predetermined type of notice mode is being executed, the pre-reading notice according to another type of notice mode may not be performed. For example, in the example of FIG. 18 (I), since the pre-reading notice is executed by using the background image displayed as the zone, the pre-reading notice using the hold display is not performed, and the display is performed as shown in (b) of FIG. The hold display 293 of the face pattern of the frog character to which the light aura 2902 is added may be a hold display based on the fact that the hold (hold 3) is “undecided” information.

  In FIG. 18 (II) shown on the right side of FIG. 18, the background information displayed as the zone is pre-read as the pre-reading notice based on the pre-holding start information of the hold 2 that has been pre-read by the pre-holding 2 start information indicated by the second hold display 292. An image is displayed. In (c) of the figure (II), the special symbol variation display is finished, and the special symbol stop symbol is displayed. During the symbol stop display of this special figure, there is a winning of one ball at the first special figure starting port 230, and the holding of the special figure 1 increases. Since the symbol is stopped here, the pre-reading notice based on the increased starting information of the holding of special figure 1 (holding 3) is not performed, and the execution possibility lottery (step S3091c shown in FIG. 12) is not performed. As shown in (c), the hold display 293 representing the increased hold 3 is displayed in the default display mode. In other words, even if different types of pre-reading notices or different types of pre-reading notices are being executed, if the winning timing is stopped, the pre-reading notice based on the increased start information will be Not executed.

  Such a background effect may be separated from the pre-reading notice, and may be a kind of effect in the effect mode according to the control state or the effect mode performed by the execution possibility lottery on the sub-control unit side 400, 500. As the effect mode, in addition to the different background images, the characters appearing may be different, the graphic shape of the hold display may be different, or the music may be different, or these may be combined as appropriate. In any case, a plurality of types of effect modes may be prepared, and the execution probability of the prefetch notice may be changed between the effect modes. For example, the second presentation mode corresponding to the non-electric support state may be less likely to be executed in advance than the first presentation mode corresponding to the electric support state, The second presentation mode corresponding to the uncertain change state may be less likely to be executed than the first presentation mode, or the first presentation mode having a higher appearance rate (production execution probability). You may make it difficult to perform a prefetch notice in the 2nd production mode with a low appearance rate.

That is,
"A prefetch notice means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least performing the prefetch notice,
Production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least producing the production;
A game machine equipped with
The effect means is capable of at least executing an effect corresponding to the first effect mode,
The effect means is capable of executing at least an effect corresponding to the second effect mode,
The first production mode is at least one of a plurality of types of production modes,
The second production mode is at least one of the plurality of types of production modes,
The pre-reading notice is less likely to be executed in the second production mode than in the first production mode,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be. Here, the phrase “difficult to execute” includes that the execution probability is 0% and not executed.

  Note that the above relationship may be reversed. That is, the first presentation mode corresponding to the power support state is more difficult to execute than the second presentation mode corresponding to the non-electric support state, or the first display mode corresponding to the non-probable change state may be executed. The first performance mode corresponding to the probable state may be less likely to be executed than the second performance mode, and the first appearance mode has a higher appearance rate than the second performance mode, which has a lower appearance rate. In the production mode, the pre-reading notice may be less likely to be executed. In addition, the prefetching notice that is difficult to execute in the second performance mode may be only a kind of prefetching notice (for example, a prefetching notice at the time of winning a prize), but other types of prefetching notices (for example, a prefetching notice at the time of change, etc.) ) May be the same. Furthermore, even in the state where there is no special status, state with hold, symbol change display state or stop display state, electric support state or non-electric support state, probability variation state or non-probability variation state as appropriate The pre-reading notice is less likely to be executed in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode.

  Next, a modification of the prefetch notice control process shown in FIG. 12 will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the flow of a modification of the prefetch notice control process shown in FIG. Here, the difference from the prefetching notice control process shown in FIG. 12 will be mainly described.

  In the prefetch notice control process shown in FIG. 12, if there is new hold information, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is stopped (step S3091b). However, in this modification, if there is new hold information in the determination in step S3092a, first, a pre-reading notice execution possibility lottery similar to step S3091c shown in FIG. 12 is performed (step S3092b). Next, as in step S3091d shown in FIG. 12, it is determined whether or not there is a winning lottery for prefetching notice execution (step S3092c). If one type of prefetching notice is not won, this prefetching notice is determined. The control process ends. On the other hand, if at least one kind of pre-reading notice is won, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is stopped in the same manner as in step S3091b shown in FIG. 12 (step S3092d). If the middle flag is turned off, the symbol is not stopped, and the second sub-control unit 500 is instructed to execute the type of pre-reading advance notice selected in step S3092b in the selected advance notice form (step S3092e), and the pre-reading advance notice is made. The control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3092d that the symbol stop flag is on, the symbol is stopped, and the pre-reading notice control process is terminated without instructing the second sub-control unit 500 to execute the pre-reading notice.

  In this modification, the first sub-control is performed when the start information of the pre-reading notice that was won was acquired during the symbol stop display despite the fact that the pre-reading notice execution lottery was won in step S3092b. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command (symbol variation display), the RAM 408 of the unit 400 stores the prefetching preview type of the type selected in step S3092b and the prefetching preview information indicating the selected preview mode. Is started), the pre-reading notice information stored in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500. In this way, the pre-reading notice is started simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a prefetch notice based on a modification of the prefetch notice control process illustrated in FIG.

  In FIG. 20 (a), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a first hold display 291 indicating hold 1 and hold 2 for special figure 1. A second hold display 292 is displayed.

  In FIG. 20B, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is finished, special symbol I stop symbol shown in FIG. 5A is displayed on special figure 1 display device 212, and decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Shows the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss. During the symbol stop display of this special figure, there is a winning of one ball at the first special figure starting port 230, and the holding of the special figure 1 increases. In this modified example, a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a pre-reading notice based on the increased hold start information (step S3092b shown in FIG. 19) is performed, and the prefetch notice using the hold display is won and the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is selected. Stores pre-reading advance notice information for changing the display form of the hold display from the default display form to the display form based on the face pattern of the frog character to which no light aura has been added. However, since the symbol is stopped at the time of winning, the default hold display 293 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20C until the next symbol variation display is started.

  Then, in FIG. 20D, the symbol variation display based on the hold 1 of the special diagram 1 is started, and simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display, the display mode of the hold display 293 is added with the light aura from the default display mode. The display mode changes according to the face pattern of the character that is not.

  In this modification, the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice simultaneously with the start of the next symbol variation display. However, a predetermined time (for example, for example, after the next symbol variation display starts) It may be changed after elapse of 3 seconds.

  Next, an example in which the prefetching notice control process shown in FIG. 12 is divided into a prefetching notice lottery process and a prefetching notice execution process will be described.

  First, in this example, in the special chart prefetching process of the main controller 300, the determination in step S224e and the determination in step S224f shown in FIG. 11 are omitted. The stop information is pre-determined by pre-reading the start information. That is, the “not determined” information is not stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area, and the special figure 1 preliminary determination result is always stored.

  Further, in this example, the prefetching notice using a specific design is the first prefetching notice, and the prefetching notice using the hold display is the second prefetching notice. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pre-reading notice displayed in the first display areas (208a to 208c) is used as the first pre-reading notice, and the second display area (the second display area narrower than the first display area ( The prefetching notice displayed in 208d) is set as the second prefetching notice.

  FIG. 21A is a flowchart showing the flow of the prefetch notice lottery process.

  The pre-reading notice lottery process shown in FIG. 21A is a routine process executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process.

  In this pre-reading notice lottery process, if there is new hold information in the determination in step S3093a, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in step S3093b before determining whether or not the special symbol is not stopped in step S3093c. Determine whether. The predetermined condition here is that the information indicating the control state included in the special figure hold increase command received this time is information indicating the big hit gaming state, and the special figure identification information is not information indicating special figure 1 This is a condition or a condition that the information indicating the control state is information indicating the electric support state (short-time state) and the special figure identification information is not information indicating the special figure 1. That is, it is not an increase in holding based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 during the big hit gaming state, nor is it an increase in holding based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 in the electric support state (short-time state). In this case, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S3093c for determining whether or not the special figure is not stopped. On the contrary, the increase in holding based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 during the big hit gaming state, or the holding increase based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 in the electric support state (short-time state) If this is the case, the prefetch notice control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S3093c that the special symbol is not stopped, a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the first prefetching notice (prefetching notice using a specific symbol) displayed in the first display area (208a-c), This is performed using the execution availability lottery table shown in FIG. 13B (step S3093d), and the process proceeds to step S3093e. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3093c that the special symbol is stopped, the process proceeds to step S3093e without performing the first prefetch notice execution lottery in step S3093d.

  In step S3093e, whether or not to execute the second prefetch notice (prefetch notice using the hold display) displayed in the second display area (208d) narrower than the first display area (208a-c) is determined. This is performed using the execution availability lottery table shown in FIG. 13C (step S3093e), and the prefetch notice lottery process is ended.

  FIG. 21B is a flowchart showing the flow of the prefetch notice execution process.

  This prefetching notice execution process is subject to the first prefetching notice notice when the first prefetching notice (prefetching notice using a specific pattern) is executed (step S3093d). On the basis of the reception of the first symbol variation start command after winning that the start information used in determining whether or not to derive the determination result has been received, the effect control process in the first sub control unit main process (step S309) ) Is executed.

  In addition, when the execution of the second prefetch notice (prefetch notice using the hold display) is performed, whether or not to determine the result of the first and second prefetch notice is determined. On the basis of the winning in which the start information used for the is generated, it is executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub control unit main process. That is, in this case, the pre-reading notice lottery process shown in FIG.

  In the pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 21B, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice execution lottery (step S3093d or step S3093e) has been won (step S3094a). Processing ends. On the other hand, if it has been won, the second sub-control unit 500 is instructed to execute the type of the pre-reading notice of the winning type in the winning notice mode (step S3094b), and the pre-reading notice execution process ends. In addition, when the first prefetch notice (prefetch notice using a specific symbol) is also instructed to be executed, the prefetch notice is started after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the instruction.

  According to the control described with reference to FIG. 21, during the symbol stop display, the prefetch notice using the hold display is performed with an execution probability higher than the execution probability of the prefetch notice using the specific symbol. That is, in the control described with reference to FIG. 21, the execution probability of the prefetching notice using the specific symbol during the symbol stop display is 0%, and the execution probability of the prefetching notice using the hold display during the symbol stop display. Is a predetermined probability higher than 0%. The execution probability of the pre-reading notice using a specific symbol during the symbol stop display may be higher than 0% if it is lower than the execution probability of the pre-reading notice using the hold display during the symbol stop display. .

  FIG. 22 is a look-ahead in an example in which an execution lottery for the first prefetch notice (prefetch notice using a specific pattern) and an execution lottery for the second prefetch notice (prefetch notice using a hold display) are performed separately. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a notice.

  In FIG. 22A, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 has been started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 represents a first hold display 291 indicating hold 1 and hold 2 for special figure 1. A second hold display 292 is displayed.

  In FIG. 22B, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is finished, and the special symbol I display unit 212 displays the stop symbol of the special figure I shown in FIG. Shows the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss. During the symbol stop display of this special figure, there is a winning of one ball at the first special figure starting port 230, and the holding of the special figure 1 increases. In this example, an execution lottery (step S3093e shown in FIG. 21) of the second prefetch notice (prefetch notice using the hold display) based on the increased hold start information is performed, and the second prefetch notice is won. As shown in FIG. 22C, the hold display 293 of the display mode by the face design of the frog character to which no aura of light is added is displayed in the second display area (208d).

  Then, in FIG.22 (d), the symbol fluctuation | variation display based on the hold 1 of the special figure 1 is started. During the symbol variation display based on the hold 1, there is also one ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold increases. Here, a lottery for determining whether or not both the first prefetching notice (prefetching notice using a specific symbol) and the second prefetching notice (prefetching notice using a hold display) based on the increased hold start information (FIG. 21). Step S3093d, e) shown in FIG. 6 is performed, and only the first prefetch notice is won, and as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the prefetch using the family crest pattern 2081 based on the increased start-up information here. The advance notice is displayed in the first display area (208a-c). Note that the hold display 294 representing the increased hold is displayed in the default display mode.

  The pre-reading notice using the family crest symbol 2081 is terminated before the symbol variation display based on the hold 1 of the special diagram 1 is terminated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The combination of symbols is stopped.

  According to the example described above, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, there is no effect (pre-reading notice) that blocks the first display area where the stop display is performed, and it may be easy to recognize the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol. . It may also be possible to entertain and entertain the expected scene. Furthermore, it is easy to clarify when the symbol is changing and when the symbol is stopped, and the concentration may be sustained. As a result, there are cases where the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In this example, the first prefetching notice is a prefetching notice using a specific design, and the second prefetching notice is a prefetching notice using a hold display, but the first prefetching notice and the second prefetching notice are used. May be the opposite. That is, during the symbol stop display, the prefetching notice using a specific symbol may be performed with an execution probability higher than the execution probability of the prefetching notice using the hold display. In this case, the execution probability of the prefetch notice using the hold display during the symbol stop display may be 0% or a predetermined probability higher than 0%. By doing this, it is easy to recognize that the symbol is stopped, and it is possible to see with a sense of expectation the increase in holding while the symbol is stopped, which may further improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, the embodiments described above and the modifications thereof may be executed in combination as appropriate according to the control state (for example, the probability variation state / non-probability variation state, or the electric support state / non-electric support state).

  Subsequently, an embodiment (second embodiment) of the second game machine of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on the differences from the gaming machine of the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted. Further, the same components as those described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  Also in the second embodiment, as in the above example, in the special figure prefetching process of the main control unit 300, the determination in step S224e and the determination in step S224f shown in FIG. 11 are omitted.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a flow of prefetch notice control processing of the first sub-control unit 400 in the second embodiment. Here, the difference from the prefetch notice control process shown in FIG. 12 will be mainly described.

  In the pre-reading notice control process shown in FIG. 12, if there is new hold information, the pre-reading notice execution lottery is performed unless the special symbol is stopped (step S3091c). However, in the look-ahead notice control process of the second embodiment, if there is new hold information in the determination in step S3096a, it is determined in step S3096b before determining whether the special symbol is not stopped in step S3096c. It is determined whether the condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition here is also the same as the predetermined condition in step S3093b shown in FIG. 21 (b), and is not an increase in holding based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 in the big hit gaming state, and the electric support state If it is not an increase in holding based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 during (short-time state), a step of determining whether or not the special figure is not stopped because the predetermined condition is satisfied. The process proceeds to S3096c. On the contrary, the increase in holding based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 during the big hit gaming state, or the holding increase based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 in the electric support state (short-time state) If this is the case, the prefetch notice control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S3096c that the special symbol is not stopped, a pre-reading notice execution lottery is performed (step S3096d). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3096c that the special symbol is stopped, whether or not the control state is changed before and after the symbol stop in the symbol variation display that is currently stopped is displayed before the prefetch notice control process is terminated. (Step S3096e), if the control state does not change, a lottery for whether or not the pre-reading notice is performed is performed in step S3096d. If the control state changes, the pre-reading notice control is performed without performing the pre-reading notice execution lottery. The process ends. In the second embodiment, the main control unit 300 transmits information representing the number of times of the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 to the first sub-control unit 400 in the symbol variation stop command. The symbol variation stop command also includes information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag, etc.). Step S3096e is a process executed when the symbol is stopped, and the first sub-control unit 400 when executing step S3096e has received the symbol stop command. In the determination in step S3096e, the determination is made based on the information indicating the number of times of the electric support number storage unit included in the symbol stop command and the information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag. That is, if the information indicating the number of times of the electric support number storage unit is 1 or more, the current symbol variation display and the next symbol variation display are performed in the electric support state, and the control state does not change before and after the symbol stop. Further, if the information indicating the number of times of the electric support number storage unit is 0 and the time reduction flag is OFF, the current symbol variation display and the next symbol variation display are performed in the non-electric support state, and before and after the symbol stop. The control state does not change. On the other hand, if the information indicating the number of times of the electric support number storage unit is 0 and the time reduction flag is ON, the control state (current control state) when the current symbol variation display is performed is the electric support state. (Corresponding to the first normal control state), the control state when the next symbol variation display is performed is the non-electric support state (corresponding to the second normal control state), before and after the symbol stop The control state changes with. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the symbol in the current electric support state (corresponding to the first normal control state) in which the control state during the next symbol variation display is the non-electric support state (corresponding to the second normal control state). When the display is stopped while the variable display is stopped and the display pattern is stopped, that is, when new start information is stored, the pre-reading notice based on the new start information is even executed. It is not executed.

  Here, the control state is switched from the electric support state to the non-electric support state, but the control state may be switched from the probability change state to the non-probability change state. In other words, the control state may be switched from the normal control state where the advantage to the player is relatively advantageous to the disadvantageous normal control state. By looking at the switching of the control state from the probability variation state to the non-probability variation state, if the effect for probability variation is performed in the first display area (208a to 208c) during the probability variation, the reverberation of the effect variation effect is enjoyed. There are cases where you can not.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a prefetch notice in the second embodiment. FIG. 24 shows a second special figure starting port 232 and a pair of blade members 2321.

  In FIG. 24 (a), it is in the electric support state, and the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure start port 232 is in the middle of the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 (hereinafter referred to as the current symbol fluctuation display). open. The symbol variation display this time is the 100th symbol variation display after the big hit game of the special diagram D (sudden time reduction) shown in FIG. Transition to the power support state. In FIG. 24B, the current symbol variation display is terminated, the special symbol 2 display device 214 displays the special symbol I stop symbol shown in FIG. 5A, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays The combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped. As shown in FIG. 24 (c), during the symbol stop display of the special figure 2, there is a winning of one ball at the second special figure start port 232, and the special figure 2 hold increases. Here, since the symbol is stopped just before the control state is switched, the pre-reading notice based on the increased starting information of the special figure 2 is not executed (step S3096d shown in FIG. 19), and FIG. ), The hold display 293 representing the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed in a default display mode.

  In the next symbol variation display, the control state shifts to the non-electric support state, and the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 are hardly opened.

  According to the second embodiment described above, it may be easy to recognize a change in the gaming state. It may also be possible to entertain and clarify the scenes that can be expected. As a result, there are cases where the interest of the game can be further improved.

  The control state switching in the main control unit 300 may be switched from the electric support state to the non-electric support state based on the transmission of the 100th symbol variation stop command, or the 100th symbol variation stop command transmission. The electronic support state may be switched to the non-electric support state during the 100th symbol variation display without waiting. For example, the switching may be performed based on the end of the process for transmitting the 100th symbol variation start command. Alternatively, the switching may be performed based on the transmission of the 101st symbol variation start command, or after the 100th symbol variation stop command is transmitted, the switching is performed based on the elapse of a fixed display time (for example, 0.6 seconds). Also good. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 may perform control in accordance with these switching timings. If the first sub-control unit 400 itself counts the number of symbol variation displays, the first sub-control unit 400 is based on command reception. Control is possible without it.

  Subsequently, various modifications of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the prefetch notice in the first modification.

  In this first modified example, a pre-reading notice is also made for an increase in the pending start-up information that has been increased due to winning a prize while the symbol is stopped. However, the winning probability in the pre-run notice advancement lottery based on the pending start information increased due to the winning of the symbol stopped, the winning probability in the pre-run notice advancement lottery based on the pending start information increased in the symbol variation display Lower than probability. In FIG. 25C when the symbol is stopped, the hold display 293 indicating the hold increased due to the winning while the symbol is stopped is displayed according to the display pattern of the face symbol of the frog character.

  In addition, the hold display that starts display while the symbol is stopped may be displayed with the display mode corresponding to the degree of expectation (reliability) of the pre-reading notice downgraded. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 25, in the lottery to determine whether or not to perform the pre-reading advance notice based on the hold start information increased due to winning when the symbol is stopped, the hold display based on the face symbol of the frog character with the light aura added However, when the symbol is stopped, the display is downgraded to a display mode with a low expectation level (reliability). It is displayed by the display mode of the face design of the character. When the display of the variation of the symbol is started, the display mode of the hold display 293 is changed to the display mode won in the execution availability lottery, that is, the display mode of the face pattern of the frog character to which the aura of light is added in this case You may return to.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in the hold display that also serves as a prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 26 (b), the pre-reading notice based on the on-hold start information increased during the symbol variation display is started. Here, a pre-reading notice using the hold display 293 is performed, and the hold display 293 is a display form of the face pattern of the frog character to which the light aura 2902 is added.

  The display mode of the hold display 293 changes during the symbol variation display, and the light aura 2902 disappears (see (c) in the figure).

  FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the prefetch notice in the second modified example.

  In this second modification, a special figure 1 hold display area is prepared on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as viewed from the player in the left symbol display area 208a, and viewed from the player in the right symbol display area 208c. A special figure 2 hold display area is prepared on the right side. In these hold display areas, the start information is displayed in order from the oldest in the order in which the start information is stored in the hold storage unit (in order of winning).

  Further, below each hold display area, there is provided a digest hold display area 2085 in which a hold for which the symbol variation display has been started, that is, a hold display representing the digested hold, is shifted and displayed.

  In FIG. 27A, the first hold display 291 representing the hold 1 of the special figure 1 is a display form in which a light aura 2902 is added to the default design (pattern of a non-patterned and gray-colored circular figure). It is displayed. The first hold display 291 is a hold display that also serves as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 27C shows a state in which the symbol variation display based on the hold 1 represented by the first hold display 291 is started and the first hold display 291 is shifted and displayed in the digest hold display area 2085. A second hold display 292 is displayed at a position where the first hold display 291 has been displayed. The time during which the first hold display 291 is displayed in the digest hold display area 2085 is a short time of about 1 second or less, or about 2 seconds or less. In the second modified example, the display mode of the hold display may change at the moment when the first hold display 291 is shifted to the digest hold display area 2085. In FIG. 27 (c), the light aura 2902 disappears, but the display pattern of the face pattern of the character of the eyelid has changed. In the game stand in the second modified example, the player's expectation is different between the addition of the light aura 2902 (first specific display mode) and the character face pattern (second specific display mode). For example, the character face pattern (second specific display mode) has a higher expectation than the addition of the light aura 2902 (first specific display mode), and the display of the character face pattern to which the light aura 2902 is added is displayed. The degree of expectation of the mode (the second specific display mode and the second specific display mode) is the highest. In FIG. 27 (c), the display mode of the hold display changes in the direction in which the player's expectation increases. In addition, the display mode of the hold display may change in a direction in which the player's expectation level decreases.

  In addition, the degree of expectation may be different between characters appearing. For example, the degree of expectation may increase in the order of niece, princess, and lord. Note that the player's expectation level is also the reliability of the look-ahead notice. For example, when a hold display in the display mode of the face pattern of the lighter with the light aura added appears, the hold design represented by the hold display is displayed. If the big hit is certain in the variable display, the reliability of the hold display in the display mode is 100%, and the expectation of the player is also 100%.

  FIG. 27D shows a state in which a time has passed since the symbol variation display based on the hold 1 is started, and the first hold display 291 disappears from the digest hold display area 2085. However, during the symbol variation display based on the hold 1, the first hold display 291 may be continuously displayed in the digest hold display area 2085. Further, the display in the digestion hold display area 2085 may be a display based on the result of the main lottery (whether or not determination) based on the start information of the hold 1 instead of the display based on the pre-determination result based on the pre-read start information. That is, the display mode in the digestion hold display area 2085 may be determined again by lottery based on the determination result at the start of symbol variation based on the hold 1.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a change in the display mode of the hold display in the second modification example in a short time.

  The short time referred to here is, for example, when there is a winning with a hold of 0, the success / failure determination based on the winning is performed immediately, and the special symbol variation display is started immediately. Although it is conceivable that the hold display based on the winning is not performed, it is a few seconds when the hold display is performed during a few seconds immediately after starting the symbol variation display based on the winning, or FIG. It may be the time during which the hold display is displayed in the digest hold display area 2085 described above. FIG. 28 shows a state in which the display mode of the hold display changes from the left to the right. When the display mode changes to the right end display mode, the hold display disappears.

  In any of the examples shown in FIGS. 28A to 28E, the display mode immediately before disappearing is a display mode to which a light aura 2902 is added. In any of the examples shown in FIGS. 28C to 28E, the light aura 2902 finally changes from the display mode not added to the display mode added. Further, in all of the examples shown in FIGS. 28A, 28B and 28D, the display pattern of the face pattern of the frog character is changed from the middle. For a player, a particular symbol such as a character's face symbol tends to overlook which character's facial symbol or the like because the time is short. In particular, in a display mode to which a light aura 2902 is added, it is difficult to identify a specific symbol. In FIG. 28A, FIG. 28B, and FIG. 28D, it is difficult to identify the change in the display mode of the face pattern of the frog character. In FIG. 28C and FIG. There is a suspicion that it has not changed to a specific symbol, but has changed.

  Therefore, in the second modification example, as in the example shown in FIGS. 28F to 28J, the symbols are not changed in a short time. That is, in FIG. 28 (f) to FIG. 28 (h), a light aura 2902 is added from the beginning to the end, but in FIG. 28 (f), there is no symbol, and in FIG. , The face design of the frog character remains the same, and in FIG. Also, in FIGS. 28 (i) to 28 (k), the light aura 2902 is not added from the beginning to the end, and in FIG. 28 (f) and FIG. 28 (j), the design remains the same. Furthermore, in the figure (k), the design changes from the default design to the face design of the frog character, but since the light aura 2902 is not added, the change is easy to understand.

  Also, in FIGS. 28 (l) and (m), an aura of light 2902 is added at the end. However, in FIG. However, it is still easy to understand, and in the same figure (m), it remains the face design of the character of the eyelid from the beginning to the end.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 28 (n), the pattern finally changes from no design to the face design of the frog character, but since the light aura 2902 disappears in accordance with the change, the change in the design is easy to understand.

  In addition to the above-described embodiments, modification examples, and modification examples, various modes are conceivable. Hereinafter, various aspects including those described so far will be described together.

  Even if Special Figure 1 is in the symbol fluctuation display in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, if Special Figure 2 is stopped, the start information based on winning in the second special figure start port 232 is pre-read. The prefetching notice to be performed may not be executed.

  In addition, when starting information is acquired based on a winning when the symbol of the special figure is stopped, whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice is determined at the time of winning, and when the pre-run notice is executed, When the symbol variation display is started, the prefetching notice may be performed in the notice mode determined at the time of winning. Furthermore, if the pre-determined result based on the pre-read start information is lost, no pre-reading notice will be given even if the symbol variation display is started, and if the pre-determined result based on the pre-read start information is a big hit, When the display is started, a prefetch notice may be started.

  In addition, when starting information is acquired based on a winning when the special symbol is stopped, the pre-reading of the starting information may not be performed, or the pre-reading notice execution lottery itself may be performed. It is also possible to adopt a mode that does not perform the above.

  In addition, if there is a prize while the special symbol is stopped when the hold is 0, a pre-reading notice based on the winning is not executed, and a prize is received while the special symbol is stopped when the hold is 1 or more. If there is, the pre-reading notice based on the winning may be executed with a predetermined probability. In this aspect, even if the pre-reading notice is performed in the second display area using the hold display, the hold may be executed when the hold is 1 or more.

  Further, when the sub-control unit side (the first sub-control unit 400 or / and the second sub-control unit 500) receives the symbol variation start command and the special figure predetermination result at the same timing, the special figure predetermination is performed. The prefetching notice based on the result may be executable.

  Furthermore, when the power supply is shut off but the timing of instantaneous return is during symbol stop and the start information is acquired based on a prize, the pre-reading notice based on the pre-read start information is not executed. Alternatively, a mode that is not limited to the pre-reading notice performed in the first display area using a specific design may be used. In addition, even if the pre-reading notice is not performed at all until all the suspensions at a predetermined time are exhausted, the pre-reading notice is not limited to the pre-reading notice performed in the first display area using a specific design. May be.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 side transmits the special figure pre-determination information to the sub-control unit side, but the sub-control unit side may be a mode in which the pre-reading and pre-determination of the starting information may not be performed. The main control unit 300 may transmit pre-read start information to the sub-control unit, and the sub-control unit may make a preliminary determination based on the pre-read start information.

  Also, during the symbol variation display, the display of the hold image (hold display) in the mode determined from the default display mode and the preview mode also serving as the pre-reading preview is started based on the pre-read start information, and the symbol is stopped. May start displaying the hold image in the default display mode (hold display) without being based on the pre-read start information.

  In the above description, there are two types of special drawings. However, one type of special drawing may be used. In this case, in the above description, “special drawing 2” is simply read as “special drawing”, and the same processing as the processing related to special drawing 2 is performed. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the special figure 2 priority change machine has been described as an example, but a winning order change machine or a simultaneous change machine may be used. Further, the process related to the special figure 1 may be performed in the same manner as the process related to the special figure 2. Furthermore, in the case of fluctuation in winning order, it must be assumed that the symbol variation of Special Figure 1 is performed even during the electric support state, and the symbol variation of Special Figure 2 is performed even during the non-electric support state. Therefore, the hold display of special figure 1 and the hold display of special figure 2 may be displayed in a combined form without being divided.

  In the above description, “starting information (for example, special figure winning random number, big hit, acquired based on the game ball entering the starting area (for example, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232) Start information storage means (for example, special chart 1 provided in RAM 308 and RAM 308) capable of storing special chart random value, small hit special chart random value, lose special chart random value, and special chart variation time determining random value The hold storage unit of FIG. 2 and the start / failure determination means for obtaining the start / failure determination result based on the acquired start information by acquiring the start information stored in the start information storage means (for example, The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and a symbol display means (for example, a decorative symbol display) for performing symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol form representing the result of the success / failure determination when the symbol variation display is performed and the symbol variation display is finished. Device 208 And a control state transition means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for transitioning the control state from the normal control state to the big hit control state when the result of the success / failure determination is a specific success / failure determination result; When the corresponding / not-needed determining means provides a notice of notifying the information related to the result of the determination on the basis of the predetermined start information by a predetermined mode (for example, a display mode using a hold display or a display mode using a specific design) A gaming machine comprising notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that can be executed based on the predetermined start information acquired before the predetermined start information is acquired. For example, the decorative symbol display device 208) displays the notice of the predetermined mode based on the start information stored by the start information storage means during the variable display of the symbol, and stops the display of the symbol mode. Amusement machine, wherein the start-up information storing means is executed at a higher execution probability than notice of the execution probability of the predetermined manner based on the starting information stored (e.g., see FIG. 16) is intended to. Was explained.

  The predetermined execution probability mentioned here may be 100% or less than 100% (the same applies hereinafter).

  Further, the execution probability of the notice of the predetermined mode based on the start information stored by the start information storage unit during the stop display of the symbol mode may be 0% or more than 0%. It may be a high percentage.

  Further, the notice means may execute the notice at a predetermined execution probability based on the predetermined start information acquired before the appropriateness determination means acquires the predetermined start information. Good. Note that the predetermined start information acquired prior to the determination by the success / failure determination unit may be acquired from the start information storage unit. What is the start information storage unit? It may be obtained from a different place.

  Here, the notice means cancels the notice of the predetermined form based on the start information stored by the start information storage means while the symbol form is stopped and displayed, or the notice form changes during the symbol change display. It may be executed with an execution probability lower than the execution probability of the notice of the predetermined mode based on the start information stored in the start information storage means. That is, the execution probability of the advance notice of the predetermined mode based on the start information stored by the start information storage unit during the display stop of the symbol form is the start information stored by the start information storage unit during the symbol variation display. The game machine may be characterized in that it is lower than the execution probability of the notice of the predetermined mode based on the above.

  In addition, variable winning means that can change between a first state in which winning of game balls is difficult and a second state in which winning of game balls is easier than the first state is provided, If the determination result is a specific success / failure determination result, the variable winning means is in a state between the first state and the second state from the normal control state in which the variable winning means maintains the first state. You may transfer a control state to the big hit control state which repeats a change.

  Further, the notice means may not perform the notice even if it is decided to give the notice by the execution availability lottery whether or not to execute the notice, or may not perform the execution lottery itself. The notice may not be given.

  Furthermore, the information related to the result of the determination on the basis of the predetermined start information by the determination unit may be information indicating that there is a possibility that the specific determination result is obtained. It may be information indicating that there is a possibility that the result will be different from the result of the determination of success / failure, or information on the jackpot control state (for example, “If you win, it is 2400 shots” Or “information such as“ 15 chances if you win ”).

  The notice means may execute a notice for notifying that the result of the validity determination based on predetermined start information by the validity determination means may be the specific validity determination result.

  Further, the notice means may start the notice before the appropriateness judgment means makes a judgment of validity based on the predetermined starting information. That is, the notice means can execute a notice for notifying the information related to the result of the validity determination based on the predetermined start information by the validity determination means in a predetermined manner before the validity determination by the appropriateness determination means. May be.

  In addition, there is provided a symbol display unit that performs symbol variation display for each starting information stored in the starting information storage unit from the start of symbol variation until the symbol mode corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed. If it is a mode, the notice effect control means is based on the predetermined start information at least one of during the symbol variation display corresponding to the predetermined start information and during the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display. A notice for notifying that the determination result is the specific determination result may be executed.

  Further, the notice means determines whether or not execution of the notice that the result of the validity determination based on the predetermined start information by the validity determination means may become the specific validity determination result corresponds to the predetermined determination means. It is also possible to execute a notice that is determined before the determination of whether or not the vehicle is based on the starting information.

  The notice means may execute the notice based on the fact that the predetermined start information is stored in the start information storage means, or the notice is stored in the start information storage. It may be executed based on receiving a command indicating that the predetermined starting information is stored in the means.

  The notice here includes a so-called prefetch notice.

  Further, in the description so far, “the symbol display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) starts a temporary display of the symbol (for example, see FIG. 16 (e)) after starting the variable display of the symbol. After being performed, the symbol form representing the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed in a real stop (for example, see FIG. 16 (g)), and the symbol change display is performed, and the notice means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) Is a temporary stop display of the symbol based on the start information stored in the start information storage means during the temporary stop display of the symbol. A game table that is executed with a predetermined execution probability during the symbol variation display in which the game is performed (see, for example, FIG. 16E). Is also explained.

  Here, after the temporary stop display is performed, the symbol variation display may be resumed, or the symbol variation display in which the display is shifted to the actual stop display without being resumed may be performed. In addition, when resuming the symbol variation display after the temporary stop display, it becomes a so-called pseudo-ream.

  Further, in the above description, “the notice means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) has a possibility that the result of the validity determination based on the predetermined start information by the validity determination means becomes the specific validity determination result. The second notice to notify that there is a different form from the predetermined form (for example, a display form using a specific symbol here) The determination means is executed at a predetermined execution probability based on the predetermined start information acquired before the predetermined start information is acquired, and the start information storage means is displayed during the stop display of the symbol form. The second notice based on the start information stored by the user is executed with an execution probability higher than the execution probability of the notice of the predetermined form based on the start information stored by the start information storage means while the symbol form is stopped and displayed. Amusement machine, characterized in that the shall. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) for displaying an effect image is provided, and the notice means provides a first notice in the image display means as a notice of the predetermined mode. (For example, a pre-reading notice using a specific symbol) in the display area (for example, the area including the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c) As a second notice (for example, a pre-read notice using a hold display) to be notified in a mode different from the above-mentioned form, a second display area (for example, an effect) narrower than the first display area in the image display means. A game machine that executes a notice in a part of the display area 208d). Is also explained.

  In addition, in the description so far, “starting information (for example, special figure winning selected) acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting area (for example, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232). A start information storage means (for example, provided in the RAM 308) capable of storing a random number value, a big hit special figure random value, a small hit special figure random value, a lose special figure random value, and a special figure changing time determination random value) The hold determination part which acquires the starting information memorize | stored in the holding | maintenance memory | storage part of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the said starting information memory | storage means, and makes a go / no-go decision based on the acquired start information The symbol display means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the symbol variation display for displaying the symbol variation indicating that the result of the determination is stopped when the symbol variation display is finished. , Decoration illustration Display device 208), and control state transition means (for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300) that shifts the control state from the normal control state to the big hit control state when the result of the determination is a specific result. The predetermined notification obtained by the corresponding determination unit before the predetermined start information is acquired by giving a notice for notifying the information related to the result of the determination based on the predetermined start information by the determination unit in a predetermined manner. A game machine including a notice unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that executes with a predetermined execution probability based on start information, wherein the control state transition unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) includes: The first normal control state from the first normal control state (for example, the electric support state) of the normal control state is based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The control state is shifted to a second normal control state (for example, a non-electric support state) having a different degree, and the notice means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is configured to display the start information during the variation display of the symbol. The notification of the predetermined mode based on the start information stored in the storage means is finished, and the symbol variation display in the first normal control state of this time when the control state during the next symbol variation display becomes the second normal control state is terminated. And executing the symbol pattern with a higher execution probability than the execution probability of the notice of the predetermined mode based on the start information stored in the start information storage means during the stop display (for example, see FIG. 24). A game table that features Is also explained.

  The notice means ends the current symbol variation display in the first normal control state in which the control state during the next symbol variation display is the second normal control state, and stops displaying the symbol aspect. The predetermined notification based on the start information stored in the start information storage means is not executed, or the predetermined information based on the start information stored in the start information storage means during the current symbol variation display. It may be executed with an execution probability lower than the execution probability of the notice in the mode. That is, the start information storage means during the time when the symbol variation display in the first normal control state is terminated and the symbol state is stopped while the control state during the next symbol variation display is the second normal control state. The execution probability of the notification of the predetermined mode based on the start information stored by the user is larger than the execution probability of the notification of the predetermined mode based on the start information stored by the start information storage means during the display of the variation of the current symbol. It may be a gaming machine characterized by being low.

  Further, the second normal control state may be a state in which the advantage for the player is disadvantageous compared to the first normal control state.

  Further, the control state transition means includes a difficult-to-enter control state (second normal control state) in which a game ball is unlikely to enter a predetermined starting area, and a gaming ball enters the predetermined starting area more than the difficult-to-enter control state. The control state may be shifted between the easy-to-enter control state (first normal control state). Here, the predetermined starting area is a variable starting area in which the size of the winning opening can be changed between a large size in which a game ball can be won and a small size in which a game ball cannot be won. Also good.

  Here, concepts such as terms and the like in the above description and the following description will be described together.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining the concept of the prefetch notice.

  First, the pre-read notice system will be described. FIG. 29A is a diagram showing a prefetch notice system.

  A plurality of types of notices (first notice type 1, first notice type 2...) Are prepared for the pre-read notice (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a notice). For example, a pre-reading notice (pre-reading notice of the first notice type 1) based on a hold display performed by changing the display form of the hold display, sometimes referred to as a hold icon, to a display form dedicated to the pre-reading notice, or the effects shown in FIG. A pre-reading notice using a feature such as the movable body 224 (first notice type 2 pre-reading notice), a pre-reading notice changing the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 (first notice type 3 pre-reading notice), or decoration Examples include a prefetching notice (first notice type 4 prefetching notice) for displaying a dedicated character or animation on the symbol display device 208 or the like, a prefetching notice by voice output (first notice type 5 prefetching notice), and the like.

  In each first notice type, a plurality of kinds of second notice types (for example, notice modes) are prepared. For example, as a display mode of the hold display, the face pattern of the frog character (second notice type 1), the face figure of the princess character (second notice type 2), and the face pattern of the Tono character (second notice type) 3), a pending change sound (second notice type 4), and the like are prepared.

  Next, the execution timing of the prefetch notice will be described. FIG. 29B is a diagram illustrating a plurality of patterns representing combinations of execution timings of the prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 29 (b), the range of the arrow represents the period during which the prefetch notice is being executed. In each pattern, a combination of the first notice type 1 and the first notice type 2 or a combination of the second notice mode in the same first notice type is shown. Hereinafter, the prefetching notice represented by the upper arrow in each pattern is referred to as a first prefetching notice, and the prefetching notice represented by the lower arrow is referred to as a second prefetch notice.

  The pattern A is a pattern in which the execution period of the first prefetch notice is completely coincident with the execution period of the second prefetch notice. The pattern B has the same length of the execution period of the first prefetch notice and the execution period of the second prefetch notice, but the start timing is a pattern that is earlier in the first prefetch notice. The prefetching notice is a pattern that is started during the execution of the first prefetching notice. In pattern C, the first prefetching notice is started first, the second prefetching notice is started during the execution of the first prefetching notice, and the first prefetching notice and the second prefetching notice are finished at the same timing. It is a pattern. In this pattern C, the execution period of the first prefetch notice is longer than the execution period of the second prefetch notice. The pattern D is a pattern in which the first prefetching notice and the second prefetching notice start at the same timing, but the second prefetching notice ends first, and the first prefetching notice ends after a delay. Even in this pattern D, the execution period of the first prefetch notice is longer than the execution period of the second prefetch notice. For pattern E, after the first prefetching notice is started, the second prefetching notice is started, the second prefetching notice ends during execution of the first prefetching notice, and the first prefetching notice is delayed. Is also a pattern that ends. Even in this pattern E, the execution period of the first prefetch notice is longer than the execution period of the second prefetch notice. The pattern F has the same period length as the execution period of the first prefetch notice and the execution period of the second prefetch notice, but the start timing is a pattern earlier in the first prefetch notice. The pre-reading notice is a pattern that starts at the same time as the end of the first pre-fetching notice. In addition, both period lengths may differ.

  It should be noted that the execution period length of the prefetch notice can be changed as long as the start timing and the end timing do not change in relation to the other prefetch notice.

  Each of the patterns described above represents an overlap between the execution period of the first prefetch notice and the execution period of the second prefetch notice, and there are various combinations of combinations of the first notice type and the second notice type. Is possible. An example thereof will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the patterns described with reference to FIG. 29B are combined.

  FIG. 30A is a diagram illustrating an example in which the pattern as the first notice type is the pattern B and the pattern in the notice type 2 is the pattern D.

  In the example shown in FIG. 30A, the second prefetch notice (first notice type 2) A2 whose start timing is later than the first prefetch notice (first notice type 1) A1 is the second notice type 1. (First prefetch notice) A21 and second notice type 2 (second prefetch notice) A22, and the relationship between the second notice type 1 (A21) and the second notice type 2 (A22) is pattern D. .

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), three types of prefetching notices are performed as the entire first notice type 1 (A1) prefetching notice. For example, the first notice type 1 (A1) is a look-ahead notice using the effect movable body 224, the second notice type 1 (A21) is a holding display of the face symbol of the frog character, and the second notice type. 2 (A22) is a holding change sound.

  FIG. 30C is a diagram illustrating an example in which the pattern as the first notice type is the pattern B and the pattern in the notice type 2 is also the pattern B.

  In the example shown in FIG. 30C, the second pre-reading notice (first notice type 2) A2 is related to the pattern B, and the second notice type 1 (first pre-reading notice) A21 and the second notice type. 2 (second pre-reading notice) A22.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 30 (d), three types of prefetching notices are performed for the prefetching notice as a whole.

  FIG. 30E is a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 30 (e), the first notice type 2 (A2) is divided into the second notice type 1 (A21) and the second notice type 2 (A22), which have a pattern B relationship. However, the end timing of the second notice type 1 (A21) is slightly earlier than that of the example shown in FIG.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 30 (f), three types of prefetching notices are performed as the entire prefetching notice. As is clear from this figure, the second notice type 1 (A21) ends earlier than the first notice type 1 (A1). That is, the first notice type 2 (A2) as a whole ends after the first notice type 1 (A1), but one of the first notice types 2 (A2) is prefetched notice (here, the second notice type). 1 (A21)) ends before the first notice type 1 (A1).

  The example described above is an example, but the combination of the first notice type and the second notice type can be variously combined as described above, and the combinations may be further combined. Patterns A to G shown in 29 (b) may be combined.

  Next, the relationship between the pre-reading notice and the special symbol symbol display will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a time chart showing the relationship between a plurality of types of prefetching notices and symbol variation display. In FIG. 31, time elapses from left to right in the figure.

  FIG. 31 shows Examples 1 to 3. Example 1 is the same as the example shown in FIG. In this example 1, the start timing of the first notice type 1 (A1) coincides with the start of the symbol variation display. That is, the first notice type 1 (A1) is started simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display. All of the prefetch notices A1, A21, and A23 are ended during the symbol variation display.

  Note that the temporal relationship with the symbol variation display may be changed while maintaining the temporal relationship between these three prefetch notices A1, A21, and A23. For example, the first notice type 1 (A1) may be matched with the stop timing of the symbol variation display. Moreover, as shown in Example 2, the relationship which straddles a symbol fluctuation display may be sufficient. Furthermore, as shown in Example 3, each period length may be lengthened or shortened.

  Further, although the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is long or short, the temporal relationship shown in FIG. 31 is also established for the symbol fluctuation display shorter or longer than the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display shown in FIG. You may do it.

  As described above, the example of the combination of the patterns B has been described here, but each pattern shown in FIG. 29B also has various temporal relationships with the symbol variation display.

  Note that the notice A22 may be executed when the start of the notice A21 is before the symbol stop. In addition, when the start of the notice A21 is stopped, the notice A22 may not be executed. In addition, when the notice A2 (notice A21) starts at the timing when the notice A22 is likely to be stopped, the notice A21 may be executed but the notice A22 may not be executed. When the notice A2 (notice A21) starts at the timing when the end of the notice A22 is likely to be in the next symbol change, the notice A21 may be executed but the notice A22 may not be executed. Even if the notice A22 may not be executed, the notice A21 may be executed. Even if the notice A22 may not be executed, the notice A1 may be executed. Further, even if the notice A22 is not executed, both the notice A1 and the notice A21 may be executed.

  In addition, the combination of the start and end of the notice A1, the start and end of the notice A21, and the start and end of the notice A22 and the change in the symbol, the symbol is suspended, and the next symbol change, At least one of A21, notice A22 is not executed, at least one of notice A1, notice A21, notice A22 is always executed, or at least two of notice A1, notice A21, notice A22 Is not executed, at least two of the notice A1, the notice A21, and the notice A22 are necessarily executed, all of the notice A1, the notice A21, and the notice A22 are not executed, the notice A1, the notice A21 All of the notice A22 may be executed without fail.

  Next, the temporal relationship between one type of prefetching notice and the special symbol variation display will be described.

  FIG. 32 is a time chart showing the relationship between one type of pre-reading notice and symbol variation display, and time elapses from left to right in the figure.

  Also in FIG. 32, the range of the arrow represents the period during which the prefetch notice is being executed. FIG. 32 shows an example in which the symbol variation display is performed four times in succession. Hereinafter, the first symbol variation display is referred to as a first variation, and the fourth symbol variation display is referred to as a fourth variation. This fourth variation corresponds to the symbol variation display subject to the advance notice of the prefetch notice.

  In the example shown in FIG. 32 (a), after the first change is started, that is, in the middle of the first change, an opportunity for a prefetch notice is generated, and immediately after the occurrence, the prefetch notice is started. Therefore, the prefetch notice in this example is started from the middle of the first variation, and is terminated at the same time as the fourth variation is started. In this example, the pre-reading notice is a continuous notice and is continuously performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. In this example, for example, there is a winning at the special figure starting port in the middle of the first change, and a pre-reading notice started when the winning is triggered. More specifically, a pre-reading notice by a hold display representing the hold of the fourth variation is applicable. Note that the pre-reading notice in this example ends at the same time as the fourth change starts, but may continue even if the fourth change starts, or may end in the middle of the fourth change. The prefetching notice may be ended simultaneously with the stop (end) of the fourth change.

  In the example shown in FIG. 32 (b), as in the example shown in FIG. 32 (a), a trigger for prefetching notice (for example, winning) occurs in the middle of the first change, and the prefetching notice starts in the middle of the first change. However, this is an example of a so-called one-time pre-reading notice in which the pre-reading notice ends before the first change stops (ends), and the pre-reading notice is not executed thereafter.

  In the example shown in FIG. 32 (c), even when a trigger for a prefetch notice occurs in the middle of the first change, the prefetch notice is started from the symbol change display that is started next. That is, this is an example in which a pre-reading notice is also started at the start of the symbol variation display, and the pre-reading notice in this example is also a continuous notice. In addition, even if the fourth variation to be notified of the prefetching notice is started, the prefetching notice continues and ends simultaneously with the stop (end) of the fourth change. However, the pre-reading notice may be ended at the same time as the fourth change is started, or may be ended in the middle of the fourth change.

  In the example shown in FIG. 32 (d), after the trigger of the pre-reading notice occurs, the pre-reading notice is performed for a predetermined period each time the symbol variation display is started until the result of the determination of whether or not to be a notice is notified. This is an example, and the look-ahead notice ends in the middle of each change. However, the pre-reading notice may be started after the start of each change. The look-ahead notice in this example also corresponds to an example of a continuous notice.

  The example shown in FIG. 32 (e) is an example in which the pre-reading notice is ended every time the symbol variation display ends until the symbol variation display to be notified starts after the trigger of the pre-reading notice occurs. A pre-reading notice starts in the middle of each change. However, if a trigger for prefetching notice occurs just before the end of the symbol variation display, the prefetching announcement is not performed in the symbol variation display. That is, when the notice period for performing the pre-reading notice is secured before the change is stopped, the pre-reading notice is also performed even in the symbol fluctuation display. Further, the prefetch notice may be ended before the symbol variation display is ended.

  In the example shown in FIG. 32 (f), as in the example shown in FIG. 32 (a), an opportunity for a prefetch notice (for example, winning) occurs in the middle of the first change, and the prefetch notice starts in the middle of the first change. Even if the first variation is stopped (terminated), the prefetching notice continues, and the prefetching notice is terminated simultaneously with the start of the next symbol variation display. Therefore, the pre-reading notice is continued even during the symbol variation display stop period (during fixed display). Note that the pre-reading notice may end after the start of the next symbol variation display.

  The temporal relationship between the one type of pre-reading notice and the special symbol change display described above is applied to one type of pre-reading notice (for example, the second notice type 1) in each pattern shown in FIG. Then, the start timing and end timing of the prefetch notice can be set at various timings.

  Moreover, when combining the respective notices for each notice type described with reference to FIG. 29, the time relations described above may be combined.

  FIG. 33 is a time chart for explaining the symbol variation display, and time elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  Fig.33 (a) is a figure for demonstrating the symbol fluctuation display and stop display in a special figure display apparatus.

  In the special drawing related lottery process (step S229, step SS231), whether or not the special figure is determined is determined, and when the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined, a value representing the determined variation time is prepared in the RAM 308. In the next main control unit timer interrupt processing set in the special figure display symbol update timer, in step S225 or step S227, the symbol variation in the special figure display device such as the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 Display starts. In the special figure display device, the 7-segment LED is repeatedly turned on and off until the fluctuation time elapses. During the period in which the 7-segment LED is repeatedly turned on and off, that is, during the variation time determined in the special figure related lottery process (steps S229 and S231), the symbol variation display is in progress.

  Eventually, when the value of the special symbol display symbol update timer becomes zero, the special symbol display device continues to display the stop symbol for a predetermined time (for example, 0.6 seconds) in step S225 and step S227. This predetermined time period is referred to as “definite display”.

  When the confirmation display time elapses, if the result of the determination is lost, and there is a special figure pending, step S225 or step S227 at the timing when the confirmation display time has elapsed. In the same interrupt process as the above-described interrupt process, whether or not the special figure is determined is determined, the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display is determined, and the value representing the determined variation time is again displayed in the special symbol display symbol update timer of the RAM 308. Set (step S229, step SS231). Then, in step S225 or step S227 in the next main control unit timer interruption process, the symbol variation display on the special figure display device is started. Since the next main control unit timer interrupt processing here starts after 4 ms, strictly speaking, it will be about 4 ms at the shortest after the final display is started until the next symbol variation display is started. A time lag will occur. In the present specification, the display during confirmation display and the time lag period are referred to as stop display.

  In addition, if the result of the determination of success / failure is a loss and there is no special figure on hold, the special figure display device displays a stop display until there is a prize at the special figure starting port. continue. Therefore, the period from the start of the fixed display to the start of the next symbol variation display is in the stop display. In other words, the period during which the special figure is being stopped is equivalent to a period during which the special figure variation display is not performed.

  FIG. 33B is a diagram for explaining the symbol variation display and the stop display in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Along with the start of the symbol variation display in the special symbol display device, the ornamental symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the ornament symbol. This variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in a form that enhances the effect with respect to the symbol variation display in the special symbol display device. For example, various reach effects such as normal reach and super reach may be performed, and the reach effect also corresponds to the change display of decorative symbols.

  Also, in the decorative symbol variation display, as one of the effects, the special symbol display device may perform a pseudo stop of the ornamental symbol before the symbol variation display is completed. FIG. 5B shows an example of the pseudo stop of the decorative symbol in order to make it seem as if the decorative symbol variation display is once finished or temporarily finished even though the special symbol display device is the symbol variation display. It is the stop mode which stops and displays the combination of the decorative design which shows. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the period during which the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped corresponds to the decorative symbol stop display. After the pseudo stop is performed for a predetermined time, the decorative symbol variation display is resumed. Hereinafter, the fact that the pseudo stop is performed one or more times during the symbol variation display in the special figure display device is referred to as pseudo continuous variation.

  Further, in the decorative symbol variation display, as another effect, the special symbol display device may perform the decorative symbol shaking stop display before the symbol variation display is completed. This decorative pattern shaking stop display is an effect that displays a combination of decorative symbols while swinging.For example, if shaking up and down, the moment when the shaking changes from upward to downward, or from upward to downward. At the moment when the direction changes, the combination of decorative symbols stops, and can be counted as one of the stop modes. It should be noted that the above-mentioned pseudo stop of the decorative symbol may also be displayed as a shaking stop to the extent that the player cannot know unless he / she is careful.

  Then, in accordance with the end of the symbol variation display in the special symbol display device, the ornament symbol display also ends in the ornament symbol display device 208, and the combination of the ornament symbols is confirmed and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display screen may be switched to a demonstration display or the like if the decorative symbol is not changed for a certain period of time. However, the decorative symbol change display is performed during the decorative symbol stop display period. This is the period that is not known.

  In addition, when it develops to super reach, the decorative symbol may be displayed small, but when it evolves from the reach state to super reach, or during the super reach, there is a period when the decorative symbol is hidden for a moment. Even during the moment when the display is hidden for a moment, it corresponds to the time when the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 34 is a time chart for explaining a time lag occurring among the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500, and time elapses from the left to the right in the figure. .

  The first sub control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300 and transmits a control command to the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the control command.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the command reception interrupt process (step S331) shown in FIG. 10B with an interrupt every 2 ms, and receives the symbol variation start command and symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Recognized as an unprocessed command. Then, an effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 10A is executed by interruption every 20 ms, and a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 also recognizes the control command from the first sub-control unit 400 as an unprocessed command by interruption every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and decorates it by interruption every predetermined interval (for example, 20 ms). Control processing of the symbol display device 208 is executed.

  Therefore, after the main control unit 300 controls the special symbol display device and the special symbol display of the special symbol starts, the first sub-control unit 400 recognizes the symbol variation start command as an unprocessed command for about 2 ms. Time lag may occur (see the dashed-dotted arrow). Also, there is a time lag of about 20 ms (period a or b in the figure) from when the first sub-control unit 400 recognizes the symbol variation start command as an unprocessed command until execution of the effect control process (step S309) or the like. May occur. In the example shown in FIG. 34, the time lag in the period a is longer than the time lag in the period b, but the length of the time lag varies depending on the timing (the same applies to other time lags).

  Furthermore, a time lag may occur after the first sub control unit 400 transmits a control command to the second sub control unit 500 until the second sub control unit 500 recognizes the control command as an unprocessed command. (See the two-dot chain arrow). In addition, a time lag may occur after the second sub-control unit 500 recognizes the symbol variation start command as an unprocessed command until the control processing of the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed.

  In FIG. 34, the period indicated by the arrow X is a period in which the first sub-control unit 400 recognizes that the special symbol is being displayed, and the period indicated by the arrow Y is the period indicated by the first sub-control unit 400. This is the period when it is recognized that the stop display is in progress.

  As described above, when the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 is used, the received command regardless of whether the special-figure display device is displaying the symbol variation or the stop display. Control is based on the fact that the special symbol variation display is not necessarily displaying the decorative symbol variation display, and conversely the decorative symbol variation display. It is not always the case that the special symbol design fluctuation display is in progress. In addition, the stop display of the special symbol does not necessarily mean the stop display of the decorative symbol. On the contrary, the stop display of the special symbol means that the special symbol is stopped. Not necessarily. However, in this specification, even if the special symbol variation display is actually finished, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 recognizes that the special symbol variation display is in progress. Indicates that the special figure is being displayed and the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 recognizes that the special figure is being stopped even if the stop display of the special figure has actually ended. The period during which the special figure is stopped may be displayed.

  Note that step S331 may be an interrupt process executed by receiving a command from the main control unit 30 or a command from the second sub control unit 500.

  Subsequently, a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, it demonstrates centering on difference with the pachinko machine demonstrated so far, and the overlapping description may be abbreviate | omitted. Further, the same components as those described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, a table set is used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the hit type and the variation time in the third embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, after the big hit game is completed, the special figure high probability state (probability variation state) is maintained while the special symbol variation display (special figure variation game) is performed 84 times, and the 85th time. Shifts to a special figure low probability state (non-probability variation state).

  FIG. 35 (a) is a diagram for explaining the winning symbol of the special symbol 1 stop symbol in the special symbol low probability normal symbol low probability state (normal state).

  In the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the big hit symbols 1 to 3 and the small hit symbol are prepared as the stop symbols of the special symbol 1 as the winning symbols. The jackpot symbol 1 is a 16R special jackpot, and the jackpot symbol 2 is a 10R special jackpot. At 16R special jackpot and 10R special jackpot, the attacker is relatively long in each round (for example, the maximum opening time of one time is 29 seconds and the time interval between opening and closing (closing time) is 1.5 seconds) To open. Hereinafter, the jackpot game that the attacker opens for a long time may be referred to as a packer game. Whether the jackpot symbol 1 or the jackpot symbol 2, after the jackpot game is finished, the special symbol high probability ordinary figure high probability state is maintained while the special symbol variation display is performed 84 times. Transition to the low probability state (normal state). When the jackpot symbol 1 or jackpot symbol 2 is stopped and displayed, the table set 21 is set in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  The jackpot symbol 3 is a 4R jackpot. In this 4R big hit, the attacker is relatively short in each round (for example, the maximum opening time of one time is 0.3 seconds and the time interval between opening and closing (closing time) is 0.5 seconds). do not do. Hereinafter, the jackpot game in which the attacker opens only for a short time may be referred to as a paka-paka game. After the 4R jackpot game ends, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state is maintained while the special figure symbol change display is performed 84 times, and in the 85th special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal state) Migrate to When the jackpot symbol 3 is stopped and displayed, the table set 22 is set in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  Note that, for example, 4R is actually 16R, but the number of Rs that the attacker opens for a long time is 4, and 5R to 16R may be those in which the attacker opens only for a short time, such as Paka Paka game. Here, n of nR may be a substantial R number. Further, only 10 rounds may be actual 10R. Furthermore, a round lamp may be provided, and when the round lamp corresponding to 10R is lit, 10R is determined, and when the round lamp corresponding to 16R is lit, it may be substantially 4R or 16R.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the table set 23 is set in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Note that the control state is not changed before and after the small hit game, and here, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal state) is maintained.

  FIG. 35B is a diagram for explaining the table set 21.

  A table set is a table with one or more types of special symbol variation display times used to determine the variation time for special symbol variation display. It is stipulated that switching is performed. The table set 21 uses the table 4 while the first 20 lost symbols change display is performed after the big hit game is finished, and the table set 21 uses the table 5 while the next 60 loses symbol change display is performed. Use the table 6 for the last four missed symbol fluctuation displays where the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is maintained, and continue to use the table 1 after shifting to the normal state. Is specified. When winning a win, another table is used for determining the change time of the symbol change display for that win, and a new table set is set after the big hit game ends.

  FIG. 35C is a diagram for explaining the table set 22.

  The table set 22 that is set when the jackpot symbol 3 that transitions to the special figure high probability low figure probability state is stopped and displayed is 84 times that the special figure high probability common figure high probability state is maintained after the jackpot game ends. It is defined that the table 3 is continuously used during the symbol change display of the loss, and the table 1 is continuously used after shifting to the normal state.

  FIG. 35D is a diagram for explaining the table set 23.

  The table set 23 is set when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the small hit game is finished, the table set 23 continues to use the table 2 during the symbol change display of 32 loses. It is specified that 1 is used continuously.

  FIG. 35 (e) is a diagram for explaining the table 4.

  In the table of this embodiment, a random number range may be defined according to the number of reserved special drawings. The table 4 is a table used in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and since it is in the electric support state, the variation time of the symbol variation display of the loss in the second special figure display device 214 is determined. It becomes a table used when. In determining the variation time, a random number lottery using a special figure variation time determination random value (a possible range is 0 to 99) in the starting information is performed. Here, a random number lottery using the special figure 2 variation time determination random value is performed. In Table 4, when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 0, the timer number 2 is determined with a probability of 100%, and when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 1 or more and 3 or less, the probability is 95%. Timer number 1 is determined and timer number 2 is determined with a probability of the remaining 5%.

  FIG. 35 (f) is a diagram for explaining the table 5.

  In Table 5, when the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, timer number 4 is determined with a probability of 95%, and timer number 6 is determined with a probability of the remaining 5%. Also, when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 1 or more and 3 or less, the timer number 2 is determined with a probability of 90%, the timer number 4 is determined with a probability of 5%, and the timer number with the probability of 5%. 6 is determined.

  FIG. 35G is a diagram for explaining the table 6.

  In Table 6, timer number 5 is determined with a probability of 100% regardless of the number of holds.

  In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about Tables 1-3.

  FIG. 35 (h) is a diagram for explaining the variation time represented by the timer number.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (h), when the timer number 2 is determined, the variation time is 2 seconds of the shortening variation, and when the timer number 1 is determined, the variation time is 0.5 times the ultra shortening variation. Second.

  When the timer number 4 is determined, the variation time is 10 seconds. When the timer number 5 is determined, the variation time is 30 seconds. When the timer number 6 is determined, the variation time is 60 seconds. become.

  In the case of using table 4 and hitting in special figure 2, or in case of using table 5 and hitting in special figure 2, or using table 6 and hitting in special figure 2, The variation time may be one type or may be a variation time selected from a plurality of types. When there are a plurality of types, the longest per unit variation time may be shorter, the same or longer than the shortest per unit variation time in the normal gaming state. Further, the longest per unit variation time may be shorter, the same or longer than the longest per unit variation time in the normal gaming state. Further, the shortest per unit variation time may be shorter, the same or longer than the longest per unit variation time in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the shortest per unit variation time may be shorter, the same or longer than the shortest per unit variation time in the normal gaming state. Further, depending on which table is used, the variation time may vary or may be the same. Further, the longest per unit variation time and the shortest per unit variation time may be different or the same. Further, when the table 4 is used, the variation time may be always longer than when the other table is used, and the same applies to the other tables. On the other hand, when the table 4 is used, the variation time may be always shorter than when the other table is used, and the same applies to the other tables.

  FIG. 36 (a) is a time chart for explaining the symbol variation display after the jackpot symbol 1 is stopped and the 16R jackpot game is performed in the third embodiment, from the left to the right of the diagram. Time passes. The upper part of FIG. 36A shows the symbol variation display in the second special figure display device 214, and the lower part shows the control state (probability change / non-probability change state).

  As described above, when the 16R jackpot game ends, the control state shifts to the probability change state. Also, the table set 21 shown in FIG. 35 (b) is set, and the table 4 is used in the first 20 loses symbol variation display after the big hit game ends, and the next 60 loses symbol variation display is performed. Table 5 is used while it is displayed.

  FIG. 36A shows a state in which the ultrashort fluctuation of 0.5 seconds is repeated after the end of the big hit game. In the figure, the arrow X1 indicates that the symbol variation is being displayed for 0.5 seconds, and the arrow Y1 indicates that the stop is being displayed.

  FIG. 36 (a) also shows a state in which a shortening variation of 2 seconds is continuously performed from the symbol variation display of the 21st loss after the big hit game ends. In the figure, an arrow X2 indicates that the symbol variation is displayed for 2 seconds, and an arrow Y2 indicates that the stop is being displayed.

  In addition, the length of the period (see arrow Y1) from the end of the symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display in the continuous ultra-shortening variation in the state where the hold remains, and the continuous state in the state where the hold still remains The length of the period (see arrow Y2) from the end of the symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display in the shortening variation may be different. That is, when the variation times are different, the length of the stop display period (for example, the fixed display period) may be varied.

  FIG. 36B is a time chart for explaining the symbol variation display and the display state of the hold icon in the decorative symbol display device when the timer number 8 in the third embodiment is selected. Time passes from to the right. The upper part of FIG. 36B shows the symbol variation display in the special symbol display device, and the lower part shows the display state of the hold icon in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 36 (b), a super-long fluctuation of 180 seconds is performed as the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a super reach effect or a pseudo continuous variation is performed during the ultra-long variation. In super reach production or pseudo continuous variation, the hold icon disappears or disappears due to the display screen becoming dark. In the time chart in the lower part of FIG. 36B, a period during which the hold icon is not visible (see arrow Z1) and a period during which the hold icon disappears (see arrow Z2) are shown as non-display periods.

  Also, before the end of the 180-second super long fluctuation, the decorative symbols are stopped from shaking, and in this example, the hold icon is displayed during the period when the shaking stops are displayed (see arrow Z3). Yes.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a modification of the table set shown in FIG.

  In this modification, when the control state changes, the main control unit 300 uses a table corresponding to the changed control state.

  FIG. 37A is a diagram for explaining a default table in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal state).

  In this modification, it is determined in advance that the table 1 is used in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal state).

  FIG. 37 (b) is a modification of the table set 21 shown in FIG. 35 (b), and FIG. 37 (c) is a modification of the table set 22 shown in FIG. 35 (c). ) Is a modification of the table set 23 shown in FIG.

  In any table set, when the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state shifts to the normal state, the table (here, table 1) based on the control state of the transfer destination is used until the control state is changed next time. It is prescribed.

  FIG. 38 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment as viewed from the front.

  A game board 200 shown in FIG. 38 is a so-called right-handed machine game board. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, the strength of launching a game ball is changed by the player's operation, so that the game ball is moved to the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port. 232. Specifically, game balls that roll in the first area (the left side in the game area) are difficult to enter the second special figure starting port 232 due to the arrangement of the game nails 238 and the like with respect to the game area 124. Or, conversely, a game ball that rolls in the second region (the right side in the game region) is configured to make it difficult or impossible to enter the first special figure starting port 230.

  In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 38, the normal start port (gate) 228 is disposed only in the right region of the left and right sides of the game board 200. It is easy to win a prize at the normal start port 228 when the right area (second area) of the game area 214 is aimed.

  Further, the second special figure starting port 232 (second starting region) is also disposed only in the right region of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure start port 232 in the third embodiment, a single blade member 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid is provided. This corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an electric Chu). That is, unlike the electric chew provided with a pair of blade members 2321 shown in FIG. 3, the electric chew in the third embodiment is a single-open electric chew. In the closed state (first state) in which the blade member 2321 is closed, it is difficult to enter the second special figure starting port 232 (difficult to win a prize state), and the open state (second state) in which the blade member 2321 is open. Then, it is easy (the winning easy state) to enter the second special figure starting port 232. The number of prize balls (the number of payouts) when entering the second special figure starting port 232 is less than 3 balls (may be 1 ball or 2 balls) or 3 balls.

  Further, the game board 200 shown in FIG. 38 is provided with a game ball guiding passage 229 between the general opening 228 and the electric chew. The ball that has passed through the normal start port 228 enters the game ball guide passage 229 and is discharged toward the electric chew. FIG. 38 shows a game ball B that passes through the game ball guide passage 229. This electric chew (second special figure starting port 232) can also be expected to win by aiming at the right side area (second area) of the game area 214.

  In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 38, only one first special figure starting port 230 (first starting area) where the ease of entry of the game ball does not change is provided at the center of the game board 200. ing. The first special figure starting port 230 is easy to win when aiming at the left side area (first area) of the game area 214. The number of prize balls (the number of payouts) when entering the first special figure starting port 232 may be larger than the number of prize balls (the number of payouts) when entering the second special figure starting port 232. If the number of prize balls in the second special figure starting port 232 is one or two, the number of prize balls in the first special figure starting port 231 may be three.

  Also, in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 38, the attacker has two types of attackers: an attacker for the packer game (first variable prize opening 235) and an attacker for the pakapaka game (second variable prize opening 237). Is provided. The packer game attacker (first variable prize opening 235) includes a door member 2351 that opens and closes during the packer game, and is provided slightly to the right of the game area 124. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided in the right area (second area) of the game area 214, and during the 16R big hit game or 10R big hit game, the right area (second area) of the game area 214. It is possible to expect a winning to the first variable winning opening 235. On the other hand, the attacker for Paka Paka game (second variable prize opening 237) includes an opening / closing piece 2371 that opens and closes during Paka Paka game, and is provided in the left area (first area) of the game area 124. During the big hit game, by aiming at the left side area (first area) of the game area 214, it is possible to expect winning in the second variable winning opening 237.

  Note that the attacker does not have to be provided separately for the attacker for the packer game and the attacker for the packer game.

  Next, game characteristics in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment will be described.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, in the non-electric support state, a left strike is made toward the left side area (first area) of the game area 214 to aim at entering the first special figure starting port 230. On the other hand, in the electric support state, the player makes a right turn toward the right area (second area) of the game area 214, passes through the normal start opening 228, and then enters the second special figure start opening 230. Aim.

  The jackpot probability in this pachinko machine is, for example, 1/399 in the non-probable change state (special figure low probability state), while it rises to, for example, 1/40 in the probable change state (special figure high probability state). Also, the probability per universal figure that leads to the opening of the electric Chu is 1/100 in the non-electric support state (normal low probability state), for example, while in the electric support state (normal high probability state), for example, It rises to 99/100. The normal symbol change time in the non-electric support state is relatively long, for example, 25 seconds, and when the non-electric support state hits the normal figure, the electric chew is released for 0.3 seconds. On the other hand, the normal symbol fluctuation time in the electric support state is relatively short, for example, 0.3 seconds, and when the electric support state hits the normal figure, the electric Chu closes the opening for 1.5 seconds. Perform three times with a time (open interval) of 0.2 seconds. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the general start port 228 during the electric support state, a determination of whether or not the normal game is successful is made. When the normal game is hit, the game ball passes through the game ball guide passage 229. In the meantime, the usual symbol variation display is performed, and the blade member 2321 of the electric chew is opened at the timing when the game ball is released from the game ball guiding passage 229. It should be noted that the length of the game ball guide passage 229 may be shortened so that the release timing from the game ball guide passage 229 may not be in time for the opening timing of the blade member 2321 of the electric chew. The length may be increased and the discharge timing may be after the blade member 2321 is opened.

  With regard to the variation time of the symbol variation of the special figure, as described with reference to FIG. 35, a plurality of types of variation times are prepared from the ultrashort variation of 0.5 seconds to the ultralong variation of 180 seconds. It should be noted that a reach effect may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a variation time of 10 seconds or more. Further, the variation time of the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be, for example, a variation time of 0.5 seconds immediately, a variation time capable of performing a super reach effect of 180 seconds, or 10 seconds. It may be a variable time.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment described above, during the electric support, when the game ball that has entered the normal start port 228 is open, the game is almost won and the right-handed game. If all the balls win the electric chew, the game ball will not decrease during the electric support, but it may decrease slightly depending on the normal fluctuation time and the electric chew release interval. Accordingly, by shortening the symbol variation time of Special Figure 2, high-speed digestion is possible. In addition, a general winning opening that can pick up game balls that have not won the electric chew at a high frequency is provided downstream of the electric chew so that the number of game balls in the electric support is maintained as it is. Also good.

  Next, specific examples of effects in the third embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example in which shaking stop display is performed from the super reach effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39, the special figure 1 hold display area in the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted, and only the special figure 2 hold display area is shown. In the special figure 2 hold display area shown in FIG. 39, the old information is displayed in order from the left in the order in which the start information is stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit of the RAM 308 (in order of winning).

  Further, on the left side of the special figure 2 hold display area, there is provided a digest hold display area 2085 in which a hold icon indicating that the symbol change display has been started, that is, a hold icon indicating the digested hold, is shifted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 8”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped and displayed. In this decorative symbol display device 208, three hold icons (hereinafter referred to as hold display) 291 to 293 representing the number of holds in the special figure 2 are shown. Any hold display is a default display mode (no pattern and one gray color).

  In FIG. 39 (b), the symbol change display based on the hold 1 indicated by the first hold display 291 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In addition, a state in which the first hold display 291 is shifted and displayed in the digest hold display area 2085 is shown. Note that a second hold display 292 shown in FIG. 39A is displayed at the position where the first hold display 291 shown in FIG. In the hold display (changed icon 290) shifted and displayed in the digest hold display area 2085, the display form changes to the notice display form of the character's face, and a notice effect is performed. The notice effect in the digestion hold display area 2085 is a kind of prefetch notice, but the notice target is the currently displayed symbol variation display (the symbol variation display). Note that the time during which the hold display is displayed in the digest hold display area 2085 is several seconds after the start of the symbol variation display, but it may be displayed before the symbol variation display ends or until the symbol variation display ends.

  In the variation display of the decorative symbols started in FIG. 39B, the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 39C, and then the super reach effect is developed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (c), the screen is completely dark as the start screen of the super reach effect (hereinafter referred to as the dark turn effect). When this darkening effect is performed, the decorative symbol variation display, the hold display, and the digest hold display area 2085 that have been displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 until now are all invisible.

  After the darkening effect, on the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 39 (e), the screen switches to the duel scene of the left hero and the right enemy character, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the screen. Has been. Note that the hold display and the digest hold display area 2085 disappear.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 39 (f), the super reach production end screen is displayed, the enemy character escapes, and the decorative symbols displayed on the upper right of the screen are “decoration 7”-“decoration 8”- The shaking stop display is started with the combination of “decoration 7”. Even in this scene, the hold display and the digest hold display area 2085 are not displayed. Here, the super reach production ends. In this manner, the hold display and the digest hold display area 2085 are not displayed from the start (FIG. 39 (d)) to the end (FIG. 39 (e)) of the super reach effect. That is, no pre-reading notice is given during the super reach production. Further, during the super reach production, the electric Chu (the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232) is opened and there is one ball entry, but the hold display indicating the increased hold is not displayed.

  When the super reach effect is thus completed, as shown in FIG. 39 (g), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the shaking stop display by the combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 8”-“decoration 7” is displayed largely. . At this timing, the hold display and the display of the digest hold display area 2085 are resumed. In the resumed on-hold display, a third on-hold display 293 representing the electric-chu winning prize during the super reach effect is additionally displayed. The third hold display 293 is displayed in a star-shaped pre-read notice display mode, and the pre-read notice is executed by the third hold display 293. As described above, the special symbol variation display is continued even during the decorative symbol shaking stop display.

  Eventually, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is finished and the display is stopped (determined display). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols after the shaking stop display is changed. Rather, “decoration 7”-“decoration 8”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of the loss, is stopped (determined). During the fixed display of the decorative symbols, the hold display is hidden and no pre-reading notice is given. Note that the hold display may be performed and the pre-reading notice may be executed by the third hold display 293.

  Next, a symbol variation start command indicating the start of symbol variation display based on the hold 1 is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 receiving the command receives the second sub control unit 400. A control command is transmitted to the control unit 500 to instruct the start of decorative symbol variation display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (i), the decorative symbol variation display is started. When the decorative symbol variation display is started, the hold display is resumed, and here, the pre-read notice is executed by the second hold display 292. Furthermore, a state in which the first hold display 291 is shifted and displayed in the digest hold display area 2085 is shown. Although the notice effect is also performed here, the hold display displayed in the digest hold display area 2085 shown in FIG. 39 (i) is a display mode of x mark.

  The example described above is the same even when the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is performed (hereinafter the same).

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example in which the shaking stop display is performed from the super reach effect and the jackpot is made. Hereinafter, the difference from the example shown in FIG. 39 will be mainly described.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 40, it has been developed into a super reach production, and the decorative symbol display device 208 switches the screen to a duel scene between the main character and the enemy as shown in FIG. 40 (e). When the main character defeats an enemy character, the decoration display displayed on the upper right of the screen starts to stop shaking with a combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”. In addition, during the super reach production, the electric Chu (the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232) is opened and there is one ball entry, but the super reach production including the hold display indicating the increased hold is included. During hold, the hold display is not displayed.

  When the super reach effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 40G, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a large display of shaking stop by the combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”. At this timing, the hold display is resumed, and the additionally displayed third hold display 293 is displayed in a star-shaped prefetch notice display mode, and the prefetch notice is being executed.

  Eventually, the symbol variation display of the special figure ends. FIG. 40 (h) shows a display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the end of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (h), there is no change in the combination of decorative symbols from the shaking stop display, and “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 7”, which is a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols. "Is stopped. Further, the hold display disappears at the same time as the special symbol variation display ends, and the pre-reading notice is not executed. In FIG. 40 (h), the digestion suspension display area 2085 is displayed, but this digestion suspension display area 2085 may be erased simultaneously with the end of the special symbol variation display. In FIG. 40 (i), the decoration symbol is being confirmed and displayed, and the combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is moved to the upper right of the screen, and the text “Congratulations” is displayed. Even during the final display of the decorative symbol, the hold display is not displayed and no pre-reading notice is given. In this example, the execution probability of the pre-reading notice is lower in the case of the big hit symbol stop display shown in FIG. 40 (h) and FIG. 40 (i) than in the case of the big symbol change display in FIG. 40 (g). . Therefore, even during the big hit symbol stop display, the pre-reading notice using the hold display may be executed with an execution probability lower than the execution probability during the big symbol change display. It should be noted that during the jackpot symbol stop display, the execution probability of the prefetch notice using the hold display may be set to 0%.

  Next, the jackpot game is started. During the big hit game, neither the special symbol variation display nor the decorative symbol variation display is performed, and both correspond to the stop display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (j), a big hit game start effect is performed. During the big hit game start effect, the combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed at the upper right of the screen, the hold display is not displayed, and no pre-reading notice is given here. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (k), a big hit effect (effect during round digestion) is performed, and a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at the upper right of the screen. Even during round digestion, the hold display is not displayed and the pre-reading notice is not executed.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the shaking stop display is performed from the super reach effect and the promotion effect is performed. Hereinafter, a description will be given focusing on differences from the example shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 41 as well, it has been developed into a super reach effect, and as shown in FIG. 41 (f), the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed on the upper right of the screen is “decoration 8” − “decoration 8” − “decoration”. The shaking stop display is started with the combination of “8”. In addition, during the super reach production, the electric Chu (the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232) is opened and there is one ball entry, but the super reach production including the hold display indicating the increased hold is included. During hold, the hold display is not displayed.

  When the super reach effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 41 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a large display of shaking stop by the combination of “decoration 8”-“decoration 8”-“decoration 8”. At this timing, the hold display is resumed, and the additionally displayed third hold display 293 is displayed in a star-shaped prefetch notice display mode, and the prefetch notice is being executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 41 (h), a promotion effect is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Even during the promotion effect, the hold display is performed and the pre-reading notice is executed by the third hold display 293.

  When the promotion effect ends, as shown in FIG. 40 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 uses a combination of "decoration 8"-"decoration 8"-"decoration 8", which may have a big hit of 15R, to provide a special 15R. The combination of “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 7”, which is determined to be a big hit, is changed, and the shaking stop display by the combination of “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” is displayed large. . Here, the hold display is performed, and the pre-reading notice is executed by the third hold display 293.

  Eventually, the symbol variation display of the special figure is finished, and the display is stopped (determined display). As shown in FIG. 41 (j), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols. -“Decoration 7” is stopped. Here, the hold display is performed, and the pre-reading notice is executed by the third hold display 293.

  It should be noted that from the time when the promotion effect is started (FIG. 41 (h)) to before the decorative symbol fixed display (FIG. 41 (i)) or until the decorative symbol fixed display ends (FIG. 41 (j)). The pre-reading notice may not be executed without displaying the hold. Further, the third hold display 293 may be returned to the default display mode and displayed at the timing of FIG. That is, unlike the case where the lost symbol is displayed in a stopped state, when the jackpot symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the hold display that has been displayed in the pre-reading notice display mode until then is displayed in the default display mode. Good. For example, when the symbol stop command transmitted from the main control unit 300 includes the jackpot symbol information, or when the symbol variation start command includes the information about the jackpot, the symbol stop command is received. The hold display that has been displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice until then may be displayed in the default display mode.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example in which a pseudo-continuous variation is performed and a big hit is made, and FIG. 43 shows a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 42, in which the table set 21 is set in the RAM 308 after the big hit game is finished. FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42A, “decoration 3”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 8”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold displays (hold icons) 291 to 293 representing the number of holds in the special figure 2 are shown. Of these three hold displays, the first hold display 291 and the third hold display 293 are displayed in a star-shaped prefetch notice display mode, and the second hold display 292 is displayed in a default display mode.

  In FIG. 42 (b), the symbol change display based on the hold 1 indicated by the first hold display 291 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In addition, a state in which the first hold display 291 is shifted and displayed in the digest hold display area 2085 is shown. In the hold display (changed icon 290) shifted and displayed in the digest hold display area 2085, the display form changes to the notice display form of the character's face, and a notice effect is performed. Further, a pre-reading notice is given by the second hold display 292.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (c), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1” − “decoration 2” − “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Actually, it is a shaking stop display. The symbol variation display of the special figure continues, and the stop display here is a pseudo stop. During the pseudo-stop, the notice effect in the digestion hold display area 2085 is executed, but the hold display disappears, and the pre-reading notice by the second hold display 292 is not executed. Note that a hold display may be performed, and a pre-reading notice by the second hold display 292 may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d), the decorative symbol variation display is resumed and the character display of “second time” is performed. In addition, the hold display has been resumed. As a result, a pre-reading notice by the second hold display 292 is performed. The notice effect in the digestion hold display area 2085 is continued.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42E, the second decorative symbol is pseudo-presented, and the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1” — “decoration 2” — “decoration 3” is performed as in the first time. Is stopped (shake stop display). Even during the second pseudo-stop, the notice effect in the digestion hold display area 2085 is executed, but the hold display has disappeared, and the prefetching notice by the second hold display 292 is not executed. In this case as well, the hold display may be performed and the pre-reading notice by the second hold display 292 may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (f), the decorative symbol variation display is resumed and the character display of “third time” is displayed. Also, the hold display has been resumed. As a result, a pre-reading notice by the second hold display 292 is performed. Note that the notice effect in the digestion hold display area 2085 continues.

  In FIG. 42 (g), reach production is started, and then developed into super reach production. At the time when the reach production is started, the hold display is performed, the pre-reading notice is executed, and the notice effect in the digestion hold display area 2085 is also executed, but the super reach production starts as in the previous examples. Then, the hold display is hidden and the digest hold display area 2085 is also hidden. That is, a pre-reading notice using the hold display may be executed during the symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 42B or the like, but during the super reach effect, the pre-reading notice using the hold display is executed. Not. The first time point during the symbol variation display is a time point before the start of the super reach effect, and may be, for example, the time point of FIG. 42 (b) or the time point of FIG. It may be, may be the time of (f) of the figure, and may be the time of (g) of the same figure. By doing so, various effects can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, there are cases in which a sharp effect can be performed when the super reach effect is being performed and when it is not, while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, there are cases in which the player's attention can be drawn to the super reach production.

  When the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 42 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a large display of shaking stop by the combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”. At this timing, the hold display and the display of the digest hold display area 2085 are resumed, and the pre-reading notice using the hold display and the notice effect in the digest hold display area 2085 are also resumed. That is, the pre-reading notice not executed during the super reach effect is executed after the super reach effect is finished and before the special figure is stopped. Since the hold display is displayed at the time of winning a prize, the hold display displayed from the beginning in the display mode of the prefetch notice corresponds to an example of the prefetch notice at the time of winning. The hold display that is displayed from the beginning in the display mode of the pre-reading notice is not displayed during the super reach effect even if the special figure start opening (230, 232) is won during the super reach effect, It is displayed after the end and before the special figure is stopped.

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 33 (b), in addition to the confirmation display, the decorative symbol stop display includes a pseudo stop (see FIGS. 42 (c) and (e)) and a shaking stop display (see FIG. 33). 42 (k)). In the example shown in FIG. 42, the pre-reading notice is not performed in the pseudo stop (see FIGS. 42 (c) and (e)), and the pre-reading notice is performed in the shaking stop display (FIG. 42 (k)). . Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (b) and the like, the pre-reading notice is performed even during the decorative display variation display. The execution probability of the prefetching notice is lower when the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped than when the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. By doing so, various effects can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, there may be a case where a distinctive effect can be performed during the decorative symbol variation display and the decorative symbol pseudo-stop. Even during the pseudo stop, the pre-reading notice may be executed with an execution probability lower than the execution probability during the variable display. Moreover, the stop mode such as the pseudo stop of the decorative design corresponds to an example of the first stop mode.

  Eventually, the special symbol variation display is terminated, and the special symbol display is stopped (determined display is in progress). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. “Decoration 7”-“Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Here, the hold display is performed, and the pre-reading notice is executed by the second hold display 292. Note that the pre-reading notice may not be performed with the hold display hidden. In addition, the notice effect in the digestion hold display area 2085 is also finished simultaneously with the end of the decorative symbol variation display.

  Next, a 16R jackpot game is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (i), the big hit effect (the effect during the round digestion) is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (j), the big hit end effect is performed. . In any of the decorative symbol display devices 208, the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at the upper right of the screen, the hold display is not displayed, and the pre-reading notice is not executed.

  FIG. 43 (k) is a diagram showing the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the jackpot game is over, and shows a state immediately before the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started. When the big hit game is finished, the control state is maintained in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state while the symbol variation display of the special figure losing is performed 84 times. Further, the table set 21 shown in FIG. 35B is set in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Here, the number of holds in special figure 2 is two as can be seen from the number of hold indications. As a result of random number lottery using special figure variable time determination random numbers, timer number 1 is shortened by 0.5 seconds. The variation is almost stochastically selected, and a 2 second shortened variation is rarely selected. If the symbol determination result of the special symbol is the jackpot symbol 1 or the jackpot symbol 2 shown in FIG. 35A, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the symbol variation display of the special symbol loss after the jackpot game ends. Until the number of times reaches 20, the effect is executed during the acceleration fluctuation period. It should be noted that whether or not the performance can be executed during the acceleration variation period may be determined by lottery on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (k), an acceleration change period start effect that is an opening effect of the effect during the acceleration change period is executed. In addition, the maximum remaining number of symbol fluctuation display in which the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is maintained is also notified. Here, the maximum number of times is set because the table set is reset and the number of times may be changed when winning a special hit (big hit, small hit). Furthermore, the hold display is resumed, the first hold display 291 is displayed in a star-shaped prefetch notice display mode, and the second hold display 292 is displayed in a default display mode.

  In FIG. 43 (l), the symbol variation display of the super shortening variation based on the hold 1 represented by the first hold display 291 is started, and in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Fluctuation display has been started. An effect is also performed during the acceleration fluctuation period. Further, the first hold display 291 is displayed in a shift display in the digest hold display area 2085. The star-shaped first hold display 291 that has been the display form of the pre-reading notice so far does not change to the notice display form of the character's face in the digestion hold display area 2085, and is the default display form (no pattern and gray). It is reported that there is a high possibility that the prefetching notice by the star-shaped first hold display 291 shown in FIG. 43 (k) is a false prefetching notice. It should be noted that in the symbol variation display in which the effect during the acceleration variation period is executed, the variation time is extremely short, so that the notice effect in the digestion hold display area 2085 is not uniformly performed or may be restricted. . Further, the hold display may not be displayed in the digest hold display area 2085. On the contrary, in the digestion suspension display area 2085, the display may be shifted in a display mode dedicated to the acceleration fluctuation period.

  In FIG. 43 (m), the symbol variation display of the special symbol is finished and the display is stopped (determined display). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. “Decoration 3”-“Decoration 2”-“Decoration 6”, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped (determined). During the final display of the decorative symbol, the hold display is not performed and the pre-reading notice is not executed. The hold display during the fixed display of the decorative symbol and the hold display in the prefetch notice mode are executed when the hold display condition and the prefetch notice condition are satisfied. The hold display condition and the prefetch notice condition are satisfied, for example, when the hold increases or when the execution control lottery on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500 is won. In the lottery for determining whether or not to hold display on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500, or in the lottery for determining whether or not to hold display based on the pre-reading notice mode, a special figure is displayed rather than during the display of a special symbol or during the display of a decorative symbol. The execution winning probability is set lower when the stop display is displayed or the decorative symbol is stopped.

That is,
“Attempt determination means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a determination of success / failure (for example, drawing a special drawing);
A symbol display means (for example, special symbol display devices 212 and 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
Prefetching notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of prefetching notices (for example, a plurality of kinds of prefetching effects shown in FIG. 51A);
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of prefetching notices is a first prefetching notice (for example, a prefetch notice at the time of winning a prize by production A (prefetching production 1)),
At least one of the plural types of prefetching notices is a second prefetching notice (for example, a prefetch notice at the time of change by the production C (prefetching production 3)),
In the symbol variation display, after the symbol variation display is performed, at least a stop display of a symbol aspect (for example, the special symbol stop symbol aspect shown in FIG. 5A) corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination is performed. Is possible,
The first pre-reading notice is less likely to be executed in the stop display state than in the variable display state (for example, the probability based on the random number range defined in the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (e), refer to the probability based on the random number range defined in the lottery table)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

  By doing so, various effects can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, there may be a sharp effect during the symbol variation display and the symbol stop display.

  The symbol variation display may include those performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (decorative symbol variation display and fourth symbol) in addition to those performed by the special symbol display devices 212 and 214. Further, the prefetching notice that is difficult to be executed in the stopped state may be only the first prefetching notice, but other types of prefetching notices (for example, a prefetch notice at the time of change) may be the same. Further, various applications can be applied depending on the type of special figure, the control state, and whether there is a hold. For example, Special figure 1 and Special figure 2, Electric support state and non-electric support state, Probability change state and Non-probability change state, Fluctuation display without hold, Fluctuation display with hold, Stop display without hold, Even in a state where stop display with hold is appropriately combined, the first prefetch notice is less likely to be executed in the stop display state than in the variable display state.

  Further, during the acceleration variation period, the pre-reading notice using the hold display may not be performed. The production is also continuously executed during the acceleration fluctuation period.

  In FIG. 43 (n), the symbol variation display of the super shortening variation based on the hold of the remaining one special figure 2 is started. In the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display has been started. Also, the first remaining display 291 that remains last is shifted and displayed in the digestion hold display area 2085, but remains in the default display mode. Here, the production is continuously executed during the acceleration fluctuation period. It is also reported that the maximum remaining number of symbol variation display in which the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is maintained is 83 times. When the symbol variation display is started, the hold display is resumed, but here, there is no hold and a display indicating that there is no hold is made.

  In FIG. 43 (o), the symbol variation display of the special symbol is finished and the display is stopped (determined display). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. “Decoration 1”-“Decoration 4”-“Decoration 9”, which are combinations of decorative symbols, are stopped (determined). In addition, while the symbol variation display of the special figure started in FIG. 43 (n) is being performed, the electric chew (the blade member 2321 of the second special figure start port 232) is opened, and the two balls are subsequently entered. There is a ball and the hold increases. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (o), the hold display is performed, and the first hold display 291 and the second hold display 292 are both displayed in the default display mode. Therefore, the hold display of the display mode of the pre-reading notice is not displayed.

  It should be noted that the period during which the hold display is hidden may be always hidden during the ST, or the period of 20 fluctuations in the first stage, the period of 60 fluctuations in the second stage, the period of four fluctuations in the third stage While at least one period is always displayed, it may be hidden only when the symbol is stopped during at least one period.

  In addition, in the period of the symbol variation display and the symbol variation display in which the control state is changed, the hold display mode may not be newly changed. For example, if the ST1 stage has 20 fluctuations, the second stage has 60 fluctuations, and the third stage has 4 fluctuations, the 19th change from the start of ST to the 19th change from the 2nd hold display to the 4th hold display is a hold change. It may not be allowed to. When the display system such as the hold display is changed for each period, the transition to the hold change or the special effect mode may be restricted particularly in the period across the control state.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example when the table set 21 is set in the RAM 308 and the remaining maximum number of symbol variation display in which the special figure high probability common figure high probability state is maintained is 50 times or less.

  In FIG. 44 (a), the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. This decorative symbol display device 208 is informed that the remaining maximum number of symbol variation displays in which the special symbol high probability normal symbol high probability state is maintained is 50 times. The table set 21 is set in the RAM 308, and the remaining maximum number of symbol variation display that maintains the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is 65 times (20 times after the big hit game is finished) as shown in FIG. 35 (e). Table 4 is used, but the table 5 shown in FIG. 35 (f) is used from the remaining maximum number of times 64 (21 after the end of the big hit game) to 5 (80 after the end of the big hit game). The effect during the acceleration variation period described with reference to FIG. 43 continues to be executed while the table 4 is being used. 44 (a) shows a special symbol variation display in which the variation time is determined using the table 5 when the number of holdings in the special diagram 2 is three when the variation time is selected. It is. While the table 5 is being used, the variation time of the special symbol variation display tends to be longer than when the table 4 is being used. In addition, the hold display is performed, the third hold display 293 is displayed in a star-shaped prefetch notice display mode, and the prefetch notice is executed. In this example, during the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the first hold display 291 is moved to the digest hold display area 2085, but disappears as soon as the digest hold display area 2085 is reached, and the first hold display. 291 (the changing icon) is not continuously displayed in the digestion pending display area 2085. In addition, during the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the pre-reading notice using the hold display may not be performed.

  In FIG. 44 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol is finished and the display is stopped (determined display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 8” is stopped (determined). During the final display of the decorative symbol, the hold display is not performed and the pre-reading notice is not executed.

  In FIG. 44C, the symbol fluctuation display of the next special figure 2 is started, and the symbol fluctuation display here is also a shortened fluctuation of 2 seconds. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol, and is notified that the remaining maximum number of times is 49. Further, the hold display is resumed, and the shift-displayed second hold display 292 is displayed in a star-shaped prefetch notice display mode, and the prefetch notice is executed.

  In FIG. 44 (d), the symbol variation display of the special symbol is finished and the display is stopped (determined display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The combination of “decoration 2”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” is stopped (determined). Even during the final display of the decorative symbol, the hold display is not performed and the pre-reading notice is not executed.

  In the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (e), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and it is reported that the remaining maximum number of times is four. Here, the symbol variation display of the special figure is a state in which the variation time is determined by using the table 6 shown in FIG. It is a pattern variation of 30 seconds. While the table 6 is being used, the variation time of the special symbol variation display tends to be longer than when the table 5 is being used. In addition, the hold display is performed, the third hold display 293 is displayed in a star-shaped prefetch notice display mode, and the prefetch notice is executed. Furthermore, since the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state will be finished soon, the curling effect is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This roaring effect continues to be executed while the table 6 is being used. It should be noted that the roaring effect may be performed only during the 30-second symbol variation display and not during the symbol stop display.

  In FIG. 44 (f), the symbol variation display of the special symbol is finished and the display is stopped (determined display). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. “Decoration 6”-“Decoration 7”-“Decoration 2”, which are combinations of decorative symbols, are stopped (determined). Even during the final display of the decorative symbol, the hold display is not performed and the pre-reading notice is not executed. In addition, the roaring effect is continuously executed.

  In FIG. 44 (g), the symbol variation display of the next special diagram 2 is started, and the symbol variation display here is also a symbol variation of 30 seconds. In the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and it is reported that the maximum remaining number is three. Further, the hold display is resumed, and the shift-displayed second hold display 292 is displayed in a star-shaped prefetch notice display mode, and the prefetch notice is executed. In addition, the production of narrative continues.

  In FIG. 44 (h), the symbol variation display of the special symbol is finished and the display is stopped (determined display). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. “Decoration 2”-“Decoration 4”-“Decoration 1”, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped (determined). Even during the final display of the decorative symbol, the hold display is not performed and the pre-reading notice is not executed. In addition, the roaring effect is continuously executed.

  In FIG. 44 (i), the control state shifts from the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state to the normal state, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The hold display is also performed, and the first hold display 291 is displayed in a star-shaped prefetch notice display mode, and the prefetch notice is executed. Further, a notice effect is provided in the digestion hold display area 2085.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example in which a 16R special jackpot is won in a normal state, and FIG. 46 is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 45, in which the table set 21 is set in the RAM 308 after the jackpot game ends. FIG.

  In FIG. 45, in the same state (a) to FIG. (I) and in the same figure (j) to FIG. is there.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal state (the special symbol low probability normal symbol low probability state) shown in FIG. 45 (a), the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold displays (hold icons) 2911 to 2931 representing the number of holds in the special figure 1 are shown. The hold display indicating the number of holds in FIG. 1 is a circle, and among these three circle hold displays, the first hold display 2911 is displayed in a black prefetch notice display mode, and the second hold display 2921 is displayed. The third hold display 2931 is displayed in a gray default display mode. On the other hand, the hold display indicating the number of holds in FIG. 2 is a hexagon, and here, the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In this example, the hold display indicating the number of holds in FIG. 1 and the hold display indicating the number of holds in FIG. 2 are displayed in the same size and slightly shifted in the left-right direction in the upper and lower two stages. In other words, the hold display indicating the number of holds in FIG. 1 is displayed in the lower row, and the hold display indicating the number of holds in FIG. 2 is displayed in the upper row. In addition, the hold display (changed icon 290) shifted and displayed in the digest hold display area 2085 is displayed in a default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (b), “decoration 3”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 8”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, are stopped and displayed. Also in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first hold display 2911 of the special figure 1 is displayed in a black pre-read notice display mode, and the second hold display 2921 and the third hold display 2931 of the special figure 1 are gray default displays. It is displayed in a manner.

  In FIG. 45 (c), the symbol variation display of the next special symbol is started. In the ornamental symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (c), the variation display of the ornamental symbol is started. Further, a state in which the first hold display 2911 is shifted and displayed in the digest hold display area 2085 is shown. In the hold display (changed icon 290) shifted and displayed in the digest hold display area 2085, the display form changes to the notice display form of the character's face, and a notice effect is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (d), the changing icon 290 of the notice display mode displayed in the digestion suspension display area 2085 disappears, and the reach effect is started. The notice effect in the digestion hold display area 2085 ends immediately before the start of the reach effect or simultaneously with the start of the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 45D to 45G, a super reach effect is performed. As in the previous examples, when the super reach effect is started, the hold display that has been displayed until then is hidden and the digest hold display area 2085 is also hidden.

  When the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 45 (h), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a shaking stop display by a combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is displayed largely. At this timing, the hold display and the display of the digest hold display area 2085 are resumed.

  Eventually, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is finished and the display is stopped (determined display). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (i), “decoration 7” − “Decoration 7”-“Decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the hold display in FIG. 1 that was displayed in the display mode of the black prefetching notice is a true prefetching notice. Here, the hold display is also performed, but the hold display may be hidden during the stop display immediately before the big hit game is started. In addition, the notice effect in the digestion hold display area 2085 is also finished simultaneously with the end of the decorative symbol variation display.

  Next, a 16R jackpot game is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (j), a big hit game start effect is performed. During the big hit game start effect, the combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed at the upper right of the screen, and the hold display is not displayed. During the big hit game start effect, a hold display may be performed, and a pre-reading notice using the hold display may be executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (k), the big hit effect (the effect during the round digestion) is performed, and the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at the upper right of the screen. During the round digestion, the hold display is not displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (l), the big hit game end effect is performed, and the hold display is not displayed here either. Note that during the jackpot game end effect, the hold display may be resumed so that a prefetch notice using the hold display can be executed.

  FIG. 46 (m) is a diagram showing the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the big hit game is finished, and shows a state immediately before the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started. When the big hit game is finished, the control state shifts to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and is maintained in the control state while the special figure losing symbol variation display is performed 84 times. When the control state shifts to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (especially the general figure high probability low probability state), the normal state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state) is displayed in the upper and lower two stages at the same size. The hold display indicating the number of holds in FIG. 1 and the hold display indicating the number of holds in FIG. 2 are larger than the hold display indicating the number of holds in FIG. The hold display that is displayed and indicates the number of hold in FIG. 1 is displayed small in the lower right corner.

  Further, the table set 21 shown in FIG. 35B is set in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and the table 4 shown in FIG. In the display device 208, an effect is executed during the acceleration fluctuation period. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (m), an acceleration change period start effect that is an opening effect of the effect during the acceleration change period is executed. In addition, the maximum remaining number of symbol fluctuation display in which the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is maintained is also notified. Furthermore, the hold display is resumed, and the hold displays (2911, 2921) indicating the number of holds in FIG. 1 that remained before the big hit game is displayed.

  In FIG. 46 (n), the symbol variation display based on the hold 1 of the special diagram 1 is started, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is started in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Yes. The symbol variation display here happens to be a shortened variation, and the symbol variation display for 2 seconds is performed. An effect is also performed during the acceleration fluctuation period. While the effect is being executed during the acceleration fluctuation period, that is, while the table 4 is being used, the pre-reading notice using the hold display and the hold display (displaying the changing icon) in the digest hold display area 2085 are performed. Prohibit or regulate not to do so.

  Here, while the symbol variation display of the special figure started in FIG. 46 (n) is performed, the electric chew (the blade member 2321 of the second special figure start port 232) is moved by the transition to the electric support state. Open, there is one ball, and one special figure 2 hold is stored.

  In FIG. 46 (o), the symbol variation display of the special symbol is finished and the display is stopped (determined display). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. “Decoration 3”-“Decoration 2”-“Decoration 6”, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped (determined). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (o) also performs hold display, and a hexagonal hold display 2912 representing the increased hold 1 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the default display mode. . In addition, a circled hold display 2911 representing the hold 1 in FIG. 1 is also displayed in a default display mode.

  Since the pachinko machine of this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, the symbol fluctuation display based on the special figure 2 hold is started in preference to the symbol fluctuation display based on the special figure 1 hold. In FIG. 46 (p), the symbol variation display of the super shortening variation based on the hold 1 of the special diagram 2 is started. In the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Has been started. It is also reported that the maximum remaining number of symbol variation display in which the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is maintained is 83 times.

  Here again, there is a ball in the electric Chu, and 2 holds of Special Figure 2 are accumulated.

  In FIG. 46 (q), the symbol variation display of the special symbol is finished and the display is stopped (determined display). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. “Decoration 1”-“Decoration 4”-“Decoration 9”, which are combinations of decorative symbols, are stopped (determined). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (q) also performs the hold display, and the first hold display 2912 and the second hold display 2922 that indicate the hold of the increased special figure 2 are both defaults. It is displayed in the display mode.

  In FIG. 46 (r), the symbol variation display of the super shortening variation based on the hold 1 of the special diagram 2 is started. In the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Has been started. In addition, it is also reported that the maximum remaining number of symbol variation display in which the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is maintained is 82 times.

  Here again, there is a ball in the electric chew and two special figure 2 holds are stored, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The second hold display 2922 and the third hold display 2932 are additionally displayed in the default display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 43 (k), the pre-reading notice using the hold display is performed even while the table 4 is used. However, in the example in FIG. 46, the table 4 is used as described above. No pre-reading notice using the hold display will be given while On the other hand, while the table 6 shown in FIGS. 44 (e) to 44 (h) is being used, a pre-reading notice using the hold display is performed. The control state in FIG. 46 and the control state in FIGS. 44 (e) to 44 (h) are both the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, and even when the same control state is used, the variable time is determined. If the tables used are different, the execution probabilities of the prefetch notice using the hold display during the symbol stop display are different. That is, a state in which the table 4 that tends to shorten the variation time is used (corresponding to an example of the second state) and a state that the table 6 that tends to increase the variation time is used (an example of the first state). Equivalent)), the execution probability of the pre-reading notice using the hold display is different, and the state in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter (second state) is the state in which the fluctuation time is likely to be longer (first state) The execution probability is lower than that. Here, the execution probability in the state where the variation time tends to be short (second state) is 0%, but the execution probability is lower than the execution probability in the state where the variation time tends to be long (first state). If it is a probability, a pre-reading notice using a hold display may be performed as in the example shown in FIG. By doing so, various effects can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, there may be a distinctive effect during stop display when the change time is short and during stop display when the change time is long.

  On the other hand, in the state where the last four symbol fluctuation displays that end the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability (corresponding to an example of the third non-big hit state), the table 6 that tends to have a long fluctuation time is used. However, the player's attention is concentrated on hitting a special figure before falling to the normal state (corresponding to an example of the first non-hit state), and hits a big hit with the current fluctuations. Whether or not it may be important. For this reason, in the state in which the last four symbol variation displays are performed, the pre-reading notice using the hold display is not performed, or it is executed with a low probability and whether or not the big hit is caused by the currently performed variation You may make it pay attention to (production). The state in which the first 20 symbol variation display after the big hit game is over (corresponding to an example of the second non-big hit state) with a margin in the player's mind is a table 4 in which the fluctuation time tends to be short. Although it is used, it may be important whether or not a big hit is caused by a change later than the change currently made. For this reason, in the state in which the first 20 symbol variation displays after the big hit game are performed, the pre-reading notice using the hold display is always performed (100%) or may be executed with a high probability of less than 100. Good.

  In addition, 84 times after the big hit game was in the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, but it may be in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal state, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability. Or it may be a special figure low probability high figure probability.

That is,
“Attempt determination means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a determination of success / failure (for example, drawing a special drawing);
A symbol display means (for example, special symbol display devices 212 and 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetching notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a prefetching notice;
Variable winning means (for example, variable winning opening 234 (attacker)) capable of at least performing a big hit operation (for example, an opening operation);
A game machine equipped with
The symbol variation display is capable of executing at least a stop display of a symbol mode (for example, the special symbol stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 5A) corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after the symbol variation display is performed. And
The variable winning means can start the jackpot operation after a first symbol mode (for example, a jackpot symbol mode) is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit,
The first symbol aspect is a symbol aspect corresponding to a jackpot in the result of the success / failure determination,
The symbol variation display can start the variation display in the first state,
The symbol variation display cannot start the variation display in the second state,
The first state is one of a plurality of types of non-hit states,
The second state is a jackpot state,
The jackpot state is a state including at least a state where the jackpot operation is performed,
At least one of the plurality of types of non-hit states is a first non-hit state (for example, a normal state: a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state),
At least one of the plurality of types of non-hit states is a second non-hit state (for example, a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state in which the table 4 shown in FIG. 35 is used)) And
At least one of the plurality of types of non-hit states is a third non-hit state (for example, a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state in which the table 6 shown in FIG. 35 is used)) And
The second non-hit state is an advantageous state over the first non-hit state,
The third non-hit state is an advantageous state over the first non-hit state,
The second non-hit state is a state that can be shifted after the big hit state,
The third non-hit state is a state that can be shifted after the second non-hit state,
The pre-reading notice (for example, pre-reading notice using a hold display) is less likely to be executed in the third non-big hit state than in the second non-big hit state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, “the first non-hit state is a non-electric support state,
The second non-hit state is a state including at least a power support state,
A game stand characterized by that. It may be.

Furthermore, “the third non-hit state is a state including at least a power support state,
A game stand characterized by that. It may be.

  Note that the first prefetch notice may not be executed in the third non-hit state. In addition, the prefetching notice that is difficult to be executed in the third non-big hit state may be only a kind of prefetching notice (for example, a prefetching notice at the time of winning a prize), but another type of prefetching notice (for example, a prefetching notice at the time of change). Etc.) may be the same. In addition, the third non-big hit state is better than the second non-big hit state even when the special figure type, the state where there is a hold, or the state where the symbols are changed or stopped are appropriately combined. However, pre-reading notice is difficult to execute.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 35 in which the table is selected (set) or the state in which the table set is selected (set) can be regarded as the symbol variation display mode. For example, the state in which the table 4 that tends to shorten the variation time is selected (set) is set as the first symbol variation display mode, and the state that the table 6 that tends to become long in the variation time is selected (set). In the case of the symbol variation display mode, the second symbol variation display mode is less likely to execute the prefetching notice using the hold display than the first symbol variation display mode. In the examples shown in FIGS. 44 and 46, the pre-reading notice using the hold display is less likely to be executed in the first symbol variation display mode than in the second symbol variation display mode. In addition, the state in which the table set 21 shown in FIG. 35A is selected (set) is set as the first symbol variation display mode, and the state in which the table set 22 is selected (set) is displayed in the second symbol variation display. In the case of the mode, the second symbol variation display mode may be less likely to execute the pre-reading notice using the hold display than the first symbol variation display mode, or may be easier to execute. May be. Alternatively, when the table set 21 is selected (set) as the first symbol variation display mode and the table set 23 is selected (set) as the second symbol variation display mode, The pre-reading notice using the hold display may be less likely to be executed or easier to be executed in the second symbol fluctuation display mode than in the first symbol fluctuation display mode. Alternatively, when the table set 22 is selected (set) as the first symbol variation display mode, and the table set 23 is selected (set) as the second symbol variation display mode, The pre-reading notice using the hold display may be less likely to be executed or easier to be executed in the second symbol fluctuation display mode than in the first symbol fluctuation display mode.

That is,
"A prefetch notice means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least performing the prefetch notice,
A symbol display means (for example, special symbol display devices 212 and 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means can execute at least symbol variation display corresponding to the first symbol variation display mode,
The symbol display means can execute at least symbol variation display corresponding to the second symbol variation display mode,
The first symbol variation display mode (for example, the state in which the table set 21 or the table 4 shown in FIG. 35 is selected (set)) is at least one of a plurality of types of symbol variation display modes,
The second symbol variation display mode (for example, a state in which the table set 22 or the table 6 shown in FIG. 35 is selected (set)) is at least one of the plural types of symbol variation display modes.
The pre-reading notice is less likely to be executed in the second symbol variation display mode than in the first symbol variation display mode,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be. Here, the phrase “difficult to execute” includes that the execution probability is 0% and not executed.

  The probability that the first variation time is selected is higher in the first symbol variation display mode than the second symbol variation display mode, and the probability that the second variation time is selected is the second symbol. The variation display mode may be higher than the first symbol variation display mode. In addition, the prefetching notice that is difficult to be executed in the second symbol variation display mode may be only a kind of prefetching notice (for example, a prefetching notice at the time of winning a prize), but other types of prefetching notice (for example, prefetching at the time of change). The notice etc.) may be the same. Furthermore, even in the state where there is no special status, state with hold, symbol change display state or stop display state, electric support state or non-electric support state, probability variation state or non-probability variation state as appropriate The pre-reading notice is less likely to be executed in the second symbol variation display mode than in the first symbol variation display mode.

  Furthermore, the symbol variation display mode described here and the above-described effect mode may be combined to vary the execution probabilities of the prefetch notice.

That is,
"A prefetch notice means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least performing the prefetch notice,
A symbol display means (for example, special symbol display devices 212 and 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
Production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least producing the production;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means can execute at least symbol variation display corresponding to the first symbol variation display mode,
The symbol display means can execute at least symbol variation display corresponding to the second symbol variation display mode,
The first symbol variation display mode (for example, the state in which the table set 21 or the table 4 shown in FIG. 35 is selected (set)) is at least one of a plurality of types of symbol variation display modes,
The second symbol variation display mode (for example, a state in which the table set 22 or the table 6 shown in FIG. 35 is selected (set)) is at least one of the plural types of symbol variation display modes.
The effect means is capable of at least executing an effect corresponding to the first effect mode,
The effect means is capable of executing at least an effect corresponding to the second effect mode,
The first production mode is at least one of a plurality of types of production modes,
The second production mode is at least one of the plurality of types of production modes,
The pre-reading notice is less likely to be executed in the second production mode than in the first production mode,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
May be,
In addition, the pre-reading notice may be less likely to be executed in the second symbol variation display mode and the second effect mode than in the first symbol variation display mode and the first effect mode, It may be easy to execute. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice may be less likely to be executed in the second symbol variation display mode and the first effect mode than in the first symbol variation display mode and the second effect mode, It may be easy to execute.

  The term “difficult to execute” includes that the execution probability is not 0%, and that execution is easy includes that the execution probability is necessarily 100% (all in this specification). the same).

  Note that the hold display displayed relatively small may not be changed. For example, the hold display shown in FIG. Moreover, in FIG. 45, although the hold display of special figure 1 and the hold display of special figure 2 are separated, a part may overlap and be displayed. For example, in the normal gaming state, the hold display in FIG. 1 is drawn on the previous layer, and when the state is shifted to the probability change state, the hold display in FIG. 1 and the hold display in FIG. The hold display may be drawn on the previous layer to reverse the context.

  Next, how the time lag between the main control unit 300 and the sub-control units 400 and 500 described with reference to FIG. 34 actually affects will be described using a specific example.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a state of the first special figure display device 212 and the decorative symbol display device 208 that can be confirmed by an actual player's eyes. In FIG. 47, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 in which the display control is performed by the main control unit 300, and the decorative symbol display device in which the display control is performed on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. 208 is shown. Also shown are a first special figure hold lamp 218 and a second special figure hold lamp 220 that are controlled by the main control unit 300.

  Both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 shown in FIG. 47A are in a stopped display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 3”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. “-Decoration 7”-“decoration 8” are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, three first special figure reservation lamps 218 are lit, and all of the second special figure reservation lamps 220 are turned off. On the other hand, on the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold indications 2911, 2921 and 2931 representing the number of holds in the special figure 1 are shown. Any hold display is a default display mode (no pattern and one gray color).

  In this example, a fourth symbol 2083 is displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol 2083 notifies that the symbol is stopped and displayed by the x symbol, and notifies that the symbol variation is being displayed by repeating blinking by the circle symbol. In the following drawings, white represents lighting and dark gray represents unlit. The display control of the fourth symbol 2083 is performed on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side.

  In FIG. 47 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device 212 repeats blinking of the central one of the seven segments. In addition, the number of lighting of the first special figure holding lamp 218 is decreased by one, and two first special figure holding lamps 218 are turned on. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the fourth symbol 2083 is circled and starts blinking. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the hold display of the special figure 1 is also started. In this movement animation, the hold display is moved obliquely to the upper left and then moved obliquely to the lower right, thereby completing the movement. That is, the first hold display 2911 moves to the digest hold display area 2085, and the second hold display 2921 moves to the position where the first hold display 2911 shown in FIG. 2931 moves to the position where the second hold display 2921 shown in FIG. In FIG. 47 (b), any of the hold displays 2911, 2921, and 2931 start moving toward the upper left diagonally.

  In FIG. 47 (c), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 started in FIG. 47 (b) is continued, and in the first special figure display device 212, one central segment is lit. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol is continued and the blinking of the circle of the fourth symbol 2083 is also continued. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation of the hold display of the special figure 1 is finished, and the hold display that is the first hold display 2911 before the start of the symbol change is the changing icon 290 in the digest hold display area 2085. It is displayed as. The changing state of the changing icon 290 is changed to the notice display mode of the character's face. In addition, the hold display that was the second hold display 2921 before the start of symbol variation is displayed as the first hold display 2911 in the default display mode. Further, the hold display that was the third hold display 2931 before the start of symbol change is changed from the default display form to the display form of the pre-reading notice, and is displayed as the second hold display 2921. The display mode of the prefetch notice here is a display mode of stars.

  In FIG. 47 (d), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 started in FIG. 47 (b) is still continuing, and the decoration symbol variation display is still continued in the decoration symbol display device 208. In addition, blinking of the circle of the fourth symbol 2083 continues. Furthermore, the first hold display 2911 is displayed in the default display mode, and the second hold display 2921 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. On the other hand, the changing icon 290 displayed in the notice display mode in the digestion hold display area 2085 disappears.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram exaggerating the influence of the time lag between the main control unit 300 and the sub control units 400 and 500 described with reference to FIG.

  Also in FIG. 48, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 in which the display control is performed by the main control unit 300, and the decorative symbol display device in which the display control is performed on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. 208 is shown. Also shown are a first special figure hold lamp 218 and a second special figure hold lamp 220 that are controlled by the main control unit 300. In the following, the points different from the points described with reference to FIG. 47 will be mainly described.

  The state shown in FIG. 48A is the same as the state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 48 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device 212 repeats blinking of the central one of the seven segments. In addition, the number of lighting of the first special figure holding lamp 218 is decreased by one, and two first special figure holding lamps 218 are turned on. However, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display from the delay in recognition of the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, the control command from the first sub-control unit 400, or the delay for waiting for interrupt processing. In addition, the blinking of the fourth symbol 2083 and the moving animation of the hold display have not started yet.

  When the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300 and the control command from the first sub-control unit 400 are recognized and the interrupt process is executed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol 2083 blinking, and the moving animation of the hold display are started, and the state is the same as the state shown in FIG. In this example, the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started after the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 on the first special symbol display device 212. In addition, the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the start of blinking of the fourth symbol 2083, and the start of the moving animation of the hold display are performed in the same frame.

  The actual player plays the game with little awareness of the time lag between the first special symbol display device 212 and the decorative symbol display device 208 here, but the main control unit 300 and the sub-control unit When the control is divided between the 400 and 500 sides, such a time lag is actually generated even though it is a very short time.

  FIG. 48D shows the latter half of the moving animation omitted in FIG. That is, any of the on-hold indications 2911, 291 and 2931 are moving obliquely downward to the right.

  The state shown in FIG. 48 (e) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 47 (c), and the state shown in FIG. 48 (f) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 47 (d).

  FIG. 49 is a diagram exaggerating the influence of a time lag different from the time lag described with reference to FIG.

  Also in FIG. 49, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 in which display control is performed by the main control unit 300, and the decorative symbol display device in which display control is performed on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. 208 is shown. Also shown are a first special figure hold lamp 218 and a second special figure hold lamp 220 that are controlled by the main control unit 300. In the following, a description will be given focusing on differences from the points described with reference to FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 49A is the same as the state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 49 (b), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device 212 repeats blinking of one central segment among the seven segments. In addition, the number of lighting of the first special figure holding lamp 218 is decreased by one, and two first special figure holding lamps 218 are turned on. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display and the blinking of the fourth symbol 2083 have not yet started. On the other hand, the moving animation of the hold display has been started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49C, the decorative symbol change display and the blinking of the fourth symbol 2083 are started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold display has been completed. The state shown in FIG. 49C is the same as the state shown in FIG. In this example as well, as in the example described with reference to FIG. 48, the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208 starts after the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 on the first special symbol display device 212. Is done. In addition, the frame of the decorative symbol display start and the blinking start of the fourth symbol 2083 is different from the frame of the hold display movement animation start, and the start of the display animation of the hold display is given priority, and the display of the decorative pattern variation display is started. It is displayed with a delay. Note that the start of the decorative display variation display may be prioritized, and the start of the hold display movement animation may be displayed with a delay. In addition, by separately rendering the decorative design variation display start frame, the fourth design 2083 blink start frame, and the hold display movement animation start frame, and performing display processing at different interrupt timings, The frames may be displayed at different timings, or the display timings may be changed by appropriately combining the frames.

  FIG. 49 (d) is a diagram showing a state where the state shown in FIG. 49 (c) is continuing, and the state shown in FIG. 49 (e) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 48 (f). .

  In FIG. 49 (f), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is finished, and the first special figure display device 212 displays the stop symbol of the loss. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display and the fourth symbol 2083 blinking have not ended yet, and the decorative symbol variation display and the fourth symbol 2083 blinking continue.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (g), the decorative symbol variation display is terminated, and the combination of the decorative symbol of “losing 2”-“decorating 1”-“decorating 3” is stopped and displayed. Has been. In addition, the blinking of the fourth symbol 2083 is ended, and a symbol stop display is informed by a cross. In this example, the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208 ends after the end of the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 on the first special symbol display device 212. That is, the decorative symbol stop display is started later than the start of the special symbol stop display.

  In the above description, there is a case where the pre-reading notice using the hold display is not executed because the hold display is not performed. However, the hold display is performed in the default display mode, and the hold display is displayed in the pre-read notice mode. The pre-reading notice may be made non-executed by not performing it. Further, the special figure high probability common figure high probability state is a probability variation state and an electric support state, but the control state may be focused only on the probability variation state. In other words, the special figure high-probability normal figure high-probability state in the above description may be read as the special figure high-probability normal figure high-probability state or the special figure high-probability normal figure low-probability state. The probability state may be read as a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state or a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. Further, the control state may be focused only on the electric support state. In other words, the special figure high-probability normal figure high-probability state in the above description may be read as the special figure high-probability normal figure high-probability state or the special figure low-probability normal figure high-probability state. The probability state may be read as a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state or a special figure high probability general figure low probability state.

  Further, since the hold display in the default display mode can be said to be a prefetch display indicating that the degree of expectation is not high, the hold display in the default display mode is displayed based on “true” prefetch information. In some cases, the pre-read information is displayed without reference at all, or it is referred to for the time being, but it may be displayed in the default display mode.

  Further, by not performing the pre-reading effect during a certain period, at the time of execution of the pre-reading effect, at least a part may be hidden by other effects, visibility may be deteriorated, or other effects may be easily seen.

  Specifically, by not adding the aura 2902 of the hold display changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, at least one of the design part and the number part constituting the decorative design becomes easy to see, or the tutorial display It may be easier to see the telop part that is performing, the fourth pattern may be easier to see, or the “border” between the background display part and the hold display part may be easier to see. In addition, it may be easier to see the “boundary” of the start of change from the stop of the symbol, and the “boundary” after the stage change and after the stage change may be easily visible, and the “boundary” before entering the reach state and after entering the reach state. May be easily visible, and the “border” immediately before the start of the super reach production and at the start of the super reach production may be easily visible.

  In addition, as described above, when the symbol variation is stopped and the symbol variation is being categorized, the variation of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not limited to the case where the symbol variation is stopped on the special symbol display device and the symbol variation is based. It may be based on the stop and the decorative pattern change of the decorative pattern. From the viewpoint of control, the main control unit 300 uses the special pattern display device during the variable pattern stop control and during the variable pattern display control as a reference. Alternatively, it may be based on the decorative design change stop control and the decorative design change display control of the decorative design display device 208 on the sub-control unit side 400, 500.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, it demonstrates centering on difference with the pachinko machine demonstrated so far, and the overlapping description may be abbreviate | omitted. Further, the same components as those described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a flow of prefetch notice control processing of the first sub control unit 400 in the fourth embodiment. Here, the difference from the prefetch notice control process shown in FIG. 12 will be mainly described.

  In the pre-reading notice control process shown in FIG. 12, if there is new hold information, the pre-reading notice execution lottery is performed unless the special symbol is stopped (step S3091c). However, in the prefetching advance notice control process of the fourth embodiment, if there is new hold information in the determination in step S3097a, it is determined in step S3097b before determining whether or not the special figure is stopped in step S3097c. It is determined whether the condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition here is also the same as the predetermined condition in step S3093b shown in FIG. 21 (b), and is not an increase in holding based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 in the big hit gaming state, and the electric support state If it is not an increase in holding based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 during (short-time state), a step of determining whether or not the special figure is not stopped because the predetermined condition is satisfied. The process proceeds to S3097c. On the contrary, the increase in holding based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 during the big hit gaming state, or the holding increase based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 in the electric support state (short-time state) If this is the case, the prefetch notice control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S3097c that the special figure is not stopped, the first pre-reading notice execution lottery is performed (step S3097d), and the pre-reading notice control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3097c that the special figure is stopped, the process proceeds directly to step S3097e.

  In step S3907e, a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the second prefetch notice is performed, and the prefetch notice control process is terminated.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the first prefetch notice and the second prefetch notice in the fourth embodiment.

  First, the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of pre-reading effects.

  FIG. 51A is a diagram showing a plurality of types of prefetch effects in the fourth embodiment.

  Here, five types of prefetching effects are prepared. The pre-reading effect 1 is an effect at the time of winning that is executed in response to a winning at the special drawing start opening (230, 232), and is an effect that changes the display mode of the above-described hold display. That is, the pre-reading effect 1 is an effect that starts immediately after winning a prize at the special figure starting port (230, 232). Hereinafter, this prefetch effect 1 may be referred to as effect A. When the special figure hold increases, the decorative symbol display device 208 adds a hold display. The state of the addition, that is, the state where the hold display increases, is displayed by an increase animation. The effect A (prefetch effect 1) is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice (for example, the display mode of the character) after displaying the hold display of the default display mode with an increasing animation.

  FIG. 51 (b) is a diagram showing an increase animation in which a hold display having a default display mode is added. In this figure, time elapses from left to right.

  The default display mode of the hold display (hold icon) here is a round, non-patterned and black display mode. The default display mode hold display 2900 gradually appears from the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the entire display appears, an aura of light 2902 is added for a moment, and then the aura 2902 disappears, and the pattern 2900 disappears. It becomes only a black solid color. The increase animation according to the default mode shown in FIG. 51B corresponds to an example of the first display mode.

  In the production A, an increase animation may be performed from the beginning in the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  FIG. 51 (c) is a diagram showing an increasing animation in which a hold display in the display mode of the prefetch notice is added. Again, time passes from left to right.

  The display mode of the pre-reading notice here is the display mode of the old character. The hold display 2905 in the display mode of the pre-reading notice appears gradually from the lower side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, like the hold display 2900 in the default display mode shown in FIG. A light aura 2902 is added for a moment. After that, the aura 2902 disappears, and only the design of the old character.

  Further, a plurality of types of display modes for the pre-reading notice may be prepared in addition to the old character, and the selection control lottery may be performed on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. Moreover, you may use properly according to the reliability of jackpot. For example, a display mode of a jackpot-determined character (for example, Tono-sama character) may be prepared, and if the pre-determined result is a jackpot, the display mode of the jackpot-determined character may appear in an increasing animation.

  Further, the increase animation is performed during the symbol variation display, but during the fixed display, there is no time for performing the animation and the increase animation is not performed. When the hold display is additionally displayed during the fixed display, the additional display is performed in an instant. More specifically, the hold display additionally displayed during the fixed display in the absence of the hold is displayed for a moment and then immediately disappeared, so that it immediately disappears. On the other hand, the hold display additionally displayed during the fixed display in a state where there is a hold is immediately switched to the moving animation. In addition, when the fixed display is finished and there is no hold and the special symbol variation display is not performed and the stop display continues, no increase animation is performed, and the hold display is displayed immediately after being displayed for a moment. Disappears quickly to be digested. Therefore, the effect A is a pre-reading effect that is executed only during the symbol variation display, and is a pre-reading effect that is not executed during the stop display of the special figure. In addition, when the special symbol variation display is not performed in the state where there is no hold and the stop display is continued, the effect A is not performed, whereas during the symbol variation display in the state where there is a hold, Since the production A is effective, when attention is paid to the execution probability in the presence / absence of holding of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning by the production A (pre-reading production 1), the state of holding (for example, the second holding number) State) and a state without a hold (for example, a state of the first number of holds). By doing so, various effects can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, there may be a sharp effect during the symbol variation display and the symbol stop display.

  As described above, it has been described that the increase animation is not performed for the additional display in a state where there is no hold and the additional display in the case where the fixed display is being performed even if there is a hold. However, the increase animation may be intentionally performed. When the increase animation is intentionally performed, the display time (scale) of the increase animation may be the same as the normal time, or may be shortened (for example, less than 0.6 seconds).

  The pre-reading effect 2 is a display mode of the pre-reading notice in the default display mode based on the winning during the symbol variation display of the special chart that starts after winning the special figure starting port (230, 232). It is an effect that changes to. That is, after the default display mode hold display is displayed with the increasing animation shown in FIG. 51 (b), it is changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice at the same time as or after the start of the symbol variation display of the next special figure. . When the symbol variation display is performed a plurality of times (when there are a plurality of suspensions) until the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice, the display mode may be changed every plurality of symbol variation displays. Alternatively, the number of times may be changed less than the number of symbol fluctuation display times (a plurality of holding numbers). Hereinafter, this prefetching effect 2 may be referred to as effect B.

  The pre-reading effect 3 is a changing effect in which a pre-reading effect display (for example, a design of a specific character) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at a predetermined timing in the special symbol design variation display. Here, the predetermined timing includes, for example, the start of fluctuation, the stop of the first symbol, the stop of the second symbol, the start of the reach effect, the reach effect, immediately before the stop of all symbols. When the symbol variation display is performed a plurality of times until the start of the symbol variation display subject to the prefetch notice, the same or different prefetch effect display may be performed for each of the plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the pre-reading effect display may be performed at a predetermined timing in the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice. Note that a plurality of types of pre-reading effect display patterns may be prepared and a selection lottery may be performed on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. Moreover, you may use properly according to the reliability of jackpot. For example, a jackpot confirmed picture (for example, a picture signed by Tono-sama) may be prepared, and if the prior determination result is a jackpot, the jackpot confirmed picture may be displayed as a pre-reading effect display. Hereinafter, this prefetch effect 3 may be referred to as effect C.

  The prefetch effect 4 is an effect that combines the effects A and C, and the prefetch effect 5 is an effect that combines the effects B and C.

  For both the first prefetch notice and the second prefetch notice, there is a possibility that the symbol variation display of the notice target may be a big hit by executing one or more kinds of prefetch effects of the multiple types of prefetch effects described above. This is a notification in advance. In addition, after the start of the pre-reading notice, when the symbol change display is performed one or more times until the symbol change display subject to notice is started, both the first pre-reading notice and the second pre-reading notice will There may be a continuous notice every display or continuously during each symbol variation display.

  FIG. 51D is a diagram showing a lottery table used in the first look-ahead notice execution availability lottery (step S3097d) shown in FIG.

  The first sub-control unit 400 acquires a dedicated random number (possible range is 0 to 99) when executing step S3097. In the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (d), a random number range is defined, and whether or not to execute the first look-ahead notice depending on which random number range the acquired dedicated random number value is included in is executed. In this case, it is determined what kind of pre-reading notice is executed.

  If the pre-determination result sent from the main control unit 300 is a loss, the first prefetch notice is not executed with a probability of 90%, and the prefetch effects 1 to 5 are executed with the remaining 10% ( (See FIG. 51 (d) for specific distribution). The first prefetch notice executed here is a false prefetch notice.

  Further, when the pre-determination result is a big hit, the first prefetch notice is executed with a probability of 50%. In this case, the execution probabilities of the prefetch effects 1 to 5 are the same. The first prefetch notice executed here is a true prefetch notice.

  Furthermore, when the prior determination result is a small hit, the first prefetch notice is not executed with a probability of 70%, but is executed with a probability of 30%. In the case of a small hit, the prefetch effects 4 and 5 are not selected, and the execution probabilities of the prefetch effects 1 to 3 are the same.

  FIG. 51E is a diagram showing a lottery table used in the second look-ahead notice execution availability lottery (step S3097e) shown in FIG.

  In the second look-ahead notice execution possibility lottery, the execution probability of the look-ahead notice changes depending on the number of holds at the time of winning the start opening. In other words, during the special figure stop display, the execution probability of the pre-reading notice varies depending on whether there is no hold or hold. On the other hand, in the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (d), which is used during the special symbol display of the special symbol, the execution probability of the pre-reading notice is determined regardless of the number of holdings. During, the execution probability of the pre-read notice does not differ depending on the number of holds.

  The first sub-control unit 400 acquires a dedicated random number (possible range is 0 to 99) even when executing step S3098. In the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (e), a combination of the number of holdings and the random number range is determined, and depending on which random number value is included in the random number range according to the number of holdings at the time of winning the start opening Whether or not to execute the second prefetch notice is determined, and if so, what kind of prefetch notice is to be executed is determined. Further, in the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (e) used in the executable lottery performed while the special figure is stopped, the prefetch effect 1 and the prefetch effect 4 are not selected.

  If the pre-determination result sent from the main control unit 300 is lost, the second pre-reading notice is not executed with a probability of 96% and the remaining pre-reading with a probability of 4% if the number of holds is 1 or more. Effects 2, 3, and 5 are executed (see FIG. 52D for specific distribution). On the other hand, if the pre-determined result is lost and the number of holds is 0, the second prefetch notice is not executed with a probability of 98%, and the prefetch effect 3 is executed with a probability of the remaining 2%. The second prefetch notice executed here is a false prefetch notice.

  Also, if the pre-judgment result is a big hit, if the number of holds is 1 or more, the second prefetch notice is not executed with a probability of 70%, and the prefetch effects 2, 3, and 5 are performed with a probability of 30%. It is executed (refer to FIG. 52D for specific distribution). On the other hand, if the pre-determined result is a big hit and the number of holds is 0, the second prefetch notice is not executed with a probability of 90%, and the prefetch effect 3 is executed with a probability of the remaining 10%. The second prefetch notice executed here is a true prefetch notice.

  Furthermore, if the pre-judgment result is a small hit, if the number of holds is 1 or more, the second pre-reading notice is not executed with a probability of 80%, and the pre-reading effects 2 and 3 are executed with a probability of the remaining 20%. (For specific distribution, see FIG. 52 (d)). That is, the prefetch effect 2 is executed with a probability of 10%, and the prefetch effect 3 is executed with a probability of 10%. On the other hand, if the pre-judgment result is a small hit, and the number of holds is 0, the second pre-reading notice is not executed with a probability of 90%, and the remaining pre-reading effect is with a probability of 10%. 3 is executed.

  When the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (d) is compared with the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (e), FIG. ) Is more likely to be selected for execution of the pre-reading notice (probability of winning the execution of the pre-reading notice) than the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (d) used during symbol variation display. Low. The probability of winning the pre-reading notice in the lottery for the pre-reading notice here is the execution probability of the pre-reading notice, and the execution of the pre-reading notice during the stop display (second probability) This is lower than the execution probability (first probability) of the prefetch notice.

  Therefore, the jackpot symbol (special symbol A) is more than the execution probability (first probability) of the look-ahead notice during the symbol variation that stops and displays the jackpot symbol (for example, the special symbol A shown in FIG. 5A). The execution probability (second probability) of the pre-reading notice during the stop display is lower. By doing so, various effects can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, you can expect a big hit during the variable display that will stop the display of the big hit symbol, while celebrating the big hit or during the big hit game starting from now on during the stop display of the big hit symbol It becomes possible.

  In the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (e), when attention is paid to the execution probability of the pre-reading notice in the presence / absence of the hold, the execution probability (the fourth hold number state) (the fourth hold number state) And the execution probability (corresponding to the third probability) of the state without holding (for example, the state of the first holding number). By doing so, various effects can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, there may be a sharp effect during the symbol variation display and the symbol stop display. More specifically, the execution probability of the pre-reading notice is lower in the state without hold than in the state with hold.

  Note that the pre-reading effect here is based on display, but the pre-reading effect may be performed by at least one of display, sound, light emission, and operation of the movable body, and only by one type. It may be performed in two types or in all types.

  In addition, the second pre-reading notice execution possibility lottery in step S3907e may have a lower execution win probability than the first pre-reading notice execution possibility lottery in step S3907d. Further, the second prefetch notice execution availability lottery may have fewer types of prefetch notices that can be executed than the first prefetch notice execution availability lottery.

  As described above, the execution probability of the pre-reading notice does not change at the winning timing at the start opening. If the symbol variation display is in progress, only the first pre-reading notice execution lottery shown in step S3097d shown in FIG. 50 is performed. On the other hand, if the stop display is in progress, the first pre-reading notice execution lottery (step S3097d) is not performed, and only the second pre-reading notice execution lottery (step S3097e) is performed. For this reason, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment is designed such that the stop display is inevitably lower than the symbol variation display when viewed from the execution probability of the entire prefetch notice. By doing so, various effects can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, there may be a sharp effect during the symbol variation display and the symbol stop display. In addition, it may be possible to make it easy to recognize the stop symbol.

  Further, when attention is paid to the execution probability of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning by the effect A (pre-reading effect 1) (corresponding to an example of the first pre-reading notice), it is shown in FIG. 51 (d) used during the symbol variation display. In the lottery table, there is a possibility that the pre-determination result is any result (the execution probability is greater than 0%), but in the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (e) used during stop display. Are not selected (execution probability is 0%). Therefore, the winning-ahead pre-reading notice by the effect A, which is at least one kind of the pre-reading notice of the plurality of types of pre-reading notices shown in FIG. Low.

  Further, when attention is paid to the execution probability of the prefetching change notice (corresponding to an example of the second prefetch notice) due to the effect C (prefetch effect 3), it is shown in FIG. 51 (d) used during the symbol change display. In the lottery table, the execution probability is 10% regardless of the result of the prior determination. On the other hand, in the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (e) used during the stop display, the execution probability is 10% except when the number of holds where the prior determination result is a loss is 0. Therefore, at least when the pre-determination result is a big hit or a small hit, the execution probability of the changing look-ahead notice is the same regardless of the start opening winning timing (whether changing or stopping). By doing so, various effects can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, there may be a sharp effect during the symbol variation display and the symbol stop display. In addition, there are cases where the execution of the pre-reading notice during fluctuation can be expected in any symbol fluctuation display.

  FIG. 52A is a diagram showing seven types of prefetching effects.

  The prefetch effects 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 52A are the same as the prefetch effects 1 to 5 shown in FIG. Like the prefetch effect 1, the prefetch effect 6 is an effect that is executed when a special prize starting port (230, 232) wins, that is, an effect that starts immediately after winning a prize. This pre-reading effect 6 is a sound output effect of an on-hold increase sound, and may be hereinafter referred to as effect D. This hold increase sound is output from the speaker 120 for a moment when the additional display of the hold display is completed, and the effect A is a pre-read effect that is executed only during the symbol variation display, and the special figure is stopped. Although the pre-reading effect is not executed during the display, the effect D is a pre-reading effect that can be executed while the special figure is stopped. The effect D (prefetch effect 6) may be an effect performed simultaneously with the effect A.

  The pre-reading effect 7 is an effect that combines the effects D and C.

  FIG. 52B is a diagram showing a modification of the second look-ahead notice execution availability lottery table shown in FIG.

  In the second look-ahead notice execution possibility lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (e), the execution probability of the look-ahead notice changes depending on the number of reservations at the time of winning the start opening, but the lottery table shown in FIG. Is not affected. In the lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (b), the prefetch effect 1 and the prefetch effect 4 are not selected.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the pre-determination result sent from the main control unit 300 is lost, the second look-ahead notice is not executed with a probability of 91%, and the remaining 9% is the probability. Prefetch effects 2, 3, 5 to 7 are executed (see FIG. 52B for specific distribution). The second prefetch notice executed here is a false prefetch notice.

  If the pre-determined result is a big hit, the second prefetch notice is executed with a probability of 49% (refer to FIG. 52B for specific distribution). The second prefetch notice executed here is a true prefetch notice.

  Furthermore, when the prior determination result is a small hit, the second prefetch notice is executed with a probability of 29% (see FIG. 52B for specific distribution). In the case of a small hit, in addition to the prefetch effects 1 and 4, the prefetch effects 5 and 7 are not selected, and any one of the prefetch effects 2, 3, and 6 is executed.

  Even when the second prefetching notice execution availability lottery table shown in FIG. 52B described above is used in the second prefetching notice execution possibility lottery (step S3097e) shown in FIG. In one pre-reading notice execution possibility lottery (step S3097d), the first pre-reading notice execution possibility lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (d) is used.

  Even if the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (d) is compared with the lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (b), the lottery table shown in FIG. Compared to the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (d) used during the symbol variation display, the probability that the pre-reading notice is selected (the probability of winning the pre-reading notice) is slightly lower. The probability of winning the prefetching notice in the prefetching notice lottery here is also the prefetching notice execution probability, and the prefetching notice execution probability (second probability) during the stop display is displayed in the symbol variation display. This is lower than the execution probability (first probability) of the look-ahead notice in. Both execution probabilities may be the same.

  Further, the effect D is a pre-reading effect that is performed only during the stop display of the special figure, and the second pre-reading notice mode (effect D) using the effect D corresponds to an example of the second mode. On the other hand, the effect A is a prefetching effect that is performed only during the display of the symbol variation of the special figure, and the first prefetch notice mode (effect A) using the effect A corresponds to an example of the first mode. In this way, if attention is paid to the effects A and D, the notification mode of the pre-reading notice is different between the symbol variation display and the stop display of the special figure. By doing so, various effects can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, there may be a sharp effect during the symbol variation display and the symbol stop display.

  Next, specific examples of effects in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a winning at the starting port during the special symbol variation display of the special symbol, and the effect A is executed as the first prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 53 (a), the special symbol variation display is performed in a state where there is no special symbol hold, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display. During the symbol variation display and the decorative symbol variation display of this special figure, as shown in FIG. 5B, there is a ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the holding of the special figure 1 increases.

  In FIG. 53C, the special symbol variation display and the decorative symbol variation display are still in progress. The special symbol variation display and the decorative symbol variation display continue until FIG. 53 (e). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (c), the first animation according to the notification mode of the increase animation, that is, the display manner of the pre-reading notice described in FIG. Pre-reading notice has started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (d), the old character hold display 2905 appears completely, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (e), the old character is lighted for a moment. Aura 2902 is added. In this example, a holding increase sound is output from the speaker 120 at this timing.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a winning at the start port during the special chart stop display, and the effect D is executed as the second prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 54 (a), there is no special figure hold, the special figure is being stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also has a combination of decorative symbols (here "decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 2"). )) Is being stopped. During the stop display of the special figure and the stop display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first special figure start port 230 has a ball and the holding of the special figure 1 increases. Here, no increase animation (effect A) is performed, and as shown in FIG. 54 (c), a hold display (here, a hold display in a default mode) 2900 is additionally displayed in an instant. At the timing when the hold display 2900 is additionally displayed, a second pre-reading notice according to the notification mode of the effect D is executed, and a hold increase sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. Note that the hold increase sound as the second pre-reading notice output here may be a sound different from the hold increase sound output in FIG.

  The additionally displayed hold display 2900 disappears in an instant, and in FIG. 54 (d), the special symbol variation display is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the decorative symbol variation display. That is, the symbol variation display based on the hold represented by the additionally displayed hold display 2900, in other words, the symbol variation display based on the winning at the timing of FIG.

  In this example, during the stop display of the special figure, the hold display is displayed in the default display mode and does not change other than the default display mode. However, it may be displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice from the beginning. However, since the increase animation is not executed and the display time of the hold display is extremely short, even if it is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice, the player may not notice the execution of the pre-reading notice, The pre-reading notice is easy to understand. While the special figure is stopped and displayed, the increased hold display is displayed in an instant in the pre-reading notice display form from the beginning (corresponding to an example of the third display form), while the special figure changes During display, the increased hold display is displayed in a certain scale called an increase animation using the pre-read notice mode (corresponding to an example of the second display mode), and the hold display also serves as the pre-read notice The notification mode (here, more specifically, the appearance mode) differs between the special symbol display during display and the stop display. By doing so, various effects can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, there may be a sharp effect during the symbol variation display and the symbol stop display.

  Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, while the special figure is stopped and displayed, the increased hold display is displayed in an instant and the hold increase sound is output. During the symbol fluctuation display, the increased hold display is displayed within a fixed scale called an increase animation regardless of whether there is an output of the hold increase sound. Specifically, the appearance mode) is different between the special symbol display during special display and the stop display.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a winning at the starting port during the special symbol variation display of the special symbol, and the effect C is executed as the first prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 55A, the special symbol variation display is performed in a state where the special symbol is not held, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display. During the symbol variation display and the decorative symbol variation display of this special figure, as shown in FIG. 5B, there is a ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the holding of the special figure 1 increases.

  In FIG. 55 (c), the special symbol variation display and the decorative symbol variation display are still in progress. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (c), a hold display 2900 having a default display mode is additionally displayed. The additional display here may be a mode of additional display in an instant, or may be a mode of additional display by the increase animation described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 55 (d), reach production is started. After the start of the reach effect, the first prefetch notice in the notification mode of effect C is started. That is, in the same figure (e), the effect which displays the design of a specific character (here, panda design 2086) on the decorative design display device 208 during the reach production is performed.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a winning at the start port during the stop display of the special figure, and the effect C is executed as the second prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 56 (a), the special figure is in a stopped display with one special figure remaining, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is also displaying the combination of the decorative symbols in a stopped state. During the stop display of the special figure and the stop display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first special figure start port 230 has a ball and the holding of the special figure 1 increases. Here, no increase animation (effect A) is performed, and as shown in FIG. 54 (c), a hold display (here, a hold display in a default mode) 2900 is additionally displayed in an instant.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (d), the special symbol variation display is started, and the additionally displayed hold display 2900 is shifted and displayed. The shift display here may be a mode in which the shift display is performed in an instant, or a mode in which the shift display is performed by the movement animation described with reference to FIG. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (d), the decorative symbol variation display is also started.

  In the variation display of the decorative symbol started in FIG. 4D, as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 5F, during the reach effect, the second pre-reading notice by the notification mode of effect C is started. That is, in the same figure (f), the effect which displays the design of a specific character (here, panda design 2086) on the decorative design display device 208 during the reach production is performed.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, the pre-reading notice during fluctuation by the effect C (pre-reading effect 3) is different from the pre-reading notice at the time of winning by the effect A, and the start opening winning timing is being displayed in the symbol variation display. Even if it is stopped or stopped, it can be executed.

  FIG. 57 (a) shows that the control state is maintained in the first control state while the symbol variation display (special symbol variation game) of the special figure is performed a predetermined number of times after the big hit game is over. It is a figure which shows the execution degree of the prefetch effect in the example which transfers to a 2nd control state.

  The first period shown in FIG. 57 (a) is a period in which the table 4 shown in FIG. 35 (e) is selected, and in the second period, the table 5 shown in FIG. 35 (f) is selected. The third period is a period in which the table 6 shown in FIG. 35 (g) is selected.

  FIG. 57B is a diagram illustrating the second period shown in FIG. 57A in further detail.

  The second period here is a period in which the symbol variation display of the loss is performed 60 times. When this period is subdivided, it becomes as shown in FIG.

  The second period A is longer than the second period B. A plurality of sets (two sets here) of the second period A and the second period B are prepared.

  The second period B may always have the same variation time regardless of the number of holds. Furthermore, the variation time may always be the same regardless of whether or not it is true. Further, an effect (such as a pre-reading notice) may be performed based on the pre-reading information. Furthermore, an effect (such as a pre-reading notice) may be performed based on the information on the change included in the change start command.

  Here, the execution frequency (execution probability) of the prefetch notice is low in the first period, high in the second period, and intermediate in the third period. The term “low” here includes a case where no execution is performed. In addition, the term “high” includes a case where it is always executed. The third period is low, the second period is high, and the first period may be intermediate, or the third period is low, the first period is high, and the second period is intermediate. There may be. Furthermore, the first period may be low, the second period may be low, and the third period may be intermediate or high. That is, the execution probability may vary depending on the period, or may be different.

  The notice type 1 shown in FIG. 57 (a) corresponds to the first notice type 1 and the second notice type 2 shown in FIG. 29 (a). The notice type 2 corresponds to the second notice type 1 and the second notice type 2 shown in FIG. Further, the notice type 1 may be a notice executed for the period shown in FIG. 32A, and the notice type 2 may be a notice executed for the period shown in FIG. Various notices described using FIG. 29 and FIG. 32 may be used. For example, the notice type 1 may be a notice that is executed only when the symbol variation is displayed, the notice type 2 may be a notice that is executed even when the symbol variation is stopped, and the notice type 2 is contrary to the symbol variation. The advance notice may be executed only during display, and the advance notice type 1 may be an advance notice that is executed even when the symbol variation is stopped. Further, the notice type 2 is not executed in the first period, and the notice type 2 is not executed in the third period. On the other hand, in the second period, both the notice type 1 and the notice type 2 can be executed. However, it may be performed at the same time and may be performed in different periods of the second period.

  In addition, in the first period and the third period, even if the number of holds is 0 and the number of holds is 3, that is, the execution frequency of the pre-reading notice is the same regardless of the number of holds. In the second period, depending on the number of holds The execution frequency of the prefetch notice changes. For example, when the number of holds is 3, the pre-reading notice may not be performed. However, even in the second period, the execution frequency of the prefetch notice may be the same in the second period A or the second period B, regardless of the number of holds.

  Here, the kind of prefetch notice will be described again. The pre-reading notice is roughly divided into a winning pre-reading notice (corresponding to an example of the second pre-reading notice here) and a variable pre-fetching notice (here equivalent to an example of the first pre-reading notice). Various notice modes are prepared by pre-reading notice.

  In other words, as described above, the pre-reading advance notice at the time of winning a prize is when the special figure starting point is awarded while the special figure start is displayed, and if the special figure increases, Production starts from. In addition, when the special figure is stopped and displayed, if the special figure starting port has a prize and the special figure increases, the special figure is displayed for a moment as the symbol variation display starts immediately. In this case, since the symbol variation display is started when the hold based on the winning is exhausted, the hold display may not be performed and the pre-reading effect may not be executed. Alternatively, it may be executed until the symbol variation display is completed instead of instantaneous execution. As an example (notice mode) of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning a prize, an increase animation pre-reading effect 1 (effect A) shown in FIGS. 51 and 52 and a sound pre-reading effect 6 (effect D) shown in FIG. 52 correspond. . Note that the pre-reading advance notice at the time of winning may be a continuous advance notice executed over a plurality of symbol variation displays. In this case, it may disappear when the erasure condition is satisfied, and may be redisplayed in the next symbol variation display, or may be continuously displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  On the other hand, as described above, the pre-reading notice at the time of fluctuating is when the special figure starting point is awarded during the special symbol variation display, and if the special symbol increases, it will be later than the current symbol variation display. The production starts from the symbol variation display. In addition, when there is a winning at the special figure starting port during the special figure stop display, and the special figure increases, the production starts from the symbol variation display started thereafter. Here, the symbol variation display to be performed later and the symbol variation display to be started thereafter may be the next variation or the variation one after another, and are not determined and determined by lottery. May be. As an example of this pre-reading notice at the time of change, as shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the pre-reading effect 2 (effect B) executed in the next change, or the pre-reading effect 3 (in which the symbol change display to be started may be determined by lottery) Production C) corresponds. Note that the change-ahead look-ahead notice may also be a continuous notice executed over a plurality of symbol change displays. In this case, it may disappear when the erasure condition is satisfied, and may be redisplayed in the next symbol variation display, or may be continuously displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a plurality of types of change prefetch notices are executed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (a), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner with one special symbol remaining. In FIG. 58A, the first hold display h11 of the default display mode is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (b), a reach state is developed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (c), a super reach effect is started. During this super reach production (during the reach state), as shown in FIG. 4D, there is a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the holding of the special figure 1 increases. For winnings during the super reach production, no hold display is performed during the super reach production, and therefore no increase animation (production A) is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5E, a super reach end effect is performed, and the super reach effect ends. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5F, the decorative symbol variation display is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 7” — “decoration 8” — “decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. Yes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6F, the second hold display h12 representing the second hold that has been won and increased in FIG. It is displayed in the display mode. In this way, the hold display that disappeared during the super reach effect is displayed at the display timing of the stop symbol, but in the symbol variation display where the super reach effect is performed, the hold display is displayed even if the stop symbol is displayed. It may be left hidden. In addition, the hold display which disappeared during the super reach production is displayed at the display timing of the stop symbol, and the second hold display h12 representing the second hold increased by winning in FIG. In this case, the pre-reading advance notice at the time of winning is executed. In this case, the display mode of the pre-reading notice may be displayed by an increase animation (effect A) or may be displayed instantly.

  In FIG. 58 (g), the symbol variation display based on the first hold indicated by the first hold display h11 shown in FIG. 58 (f) is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Fluctuation is displayed. In FIG. 58 (g), the second hold display h12 of the default display mode shown in FIG. 58 (f) is shifted and displayed as the first hold display h11, changing to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. . The first hold display h11 that has changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice corresponds to the effect B, and the prefetch notice at the time of change is being executed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (h), the state is developed again into the reach state, and as shown in FIG. 58 (i), the prefetch notice at the time of change by the notification mode of the effect C is started during the reach effect. Yes. Here, during the reach effect, an effect of displaying a design of a specific character (here, a panda pattern 2086) on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In this figure (i), the production B and the production C are executed simultaneously. That is, the prefetch effect 5 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52 is executed, and the first type of notice of change prefetch notice and the second type of notice of change prefetch notice are simultaneously performed.

  When the second hold display h12 is displayed in the display form of the pre-reading notice at the stage of FIG. 58 (f) (when the pre-reading notice at the time of winning is executed), the next change is started in FIG. 58 (g). Even if the display is shifted to the first hold display h11, if it continues to be displayed in the display form of the pre-reading notice, the pre-reading notice at the time of winning will be continued even in the next change. In this case, In FIG. 6 (i), the pre-reading notice at the time of winning and the pre-fetching notice at the time of change are performed simultaneously (for example, the pre-reading effect 4 is executed).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6J, the decorative symbol variation display is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost pattern (“decoration 7”-“decoration 8”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. Yes. When the reach state is completed, the panda pattern 2086 of the production C disappears, but the first hold display h11 in the display mode of the pre-reading notice is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 58 (k), the symbol change display based on the first hold indicated by the first hold display h11 in the display form of the pre-reading notice is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The display is done. Note that the first hold display h11 disappears instantaneously at the same time when the symbol variation display starts or slowly after the symbol variation display starts. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 11L, the state is developed into a reach state. As shown in FIG. 11M, during the reach effect, the prefetching notice at the time of change according to the notification mode of the effect C (panda pattern 2086). Is displayed again.

  Note that the panda pattern 2086 displayed here is a pre-reading notice at the time of change, but as an effect of a normal notice for announcing the symbol that is stopped and displayed at the present time of changing the pattern display, the effect of the pre-reading notice at the time of change The production of the same aspect as that of the above, that is, the display of the panda pattern 2086 may be performed here. In addition, in the case of performing a so-called quasi-continuous variation effect in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped one or more times during the symbol variation display, in the temporary stop state, the effect in the same manner as in the variation prefetch notice effect, In other words, the panda pattern 2086 may be displayed here.

In the above explanation,
“Storage means capable of storing at least start information (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300);
A symbol display means (for example, a special symbol display device 212) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetch notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of prefetch notice;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of executing the symbol variation display corresponding to the start information,
One kind of prefetching notice among the plurality of kinds of prefetching notices is a first prefetching notice (for example, prefetching effect 3 of the variable prefetching notice),
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the first prefetch notice at least with a first probability when the first condition is satisfied,
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the first prefetch notice at least with a second probability when the second condition is satisfied,
The establishment requirement of the first condition includes at least that the storage unit stores the start-up information in a first period (for example, a time point during symbol variation display),
The establishment requirement of the second condition includes at least that the storage unit stores the start information in a second period (for example, a time point during symbol stop display),
The first period is different from the second period;
The first probability is the same probability as the second probability (for example, 2% at the outset in FIG. 51D and 2% at the outset in FIG. 51E).
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

The first condition may be satisfied in addition to the case where the storage unit stores the start information in the first period (the same applies hereinafter).
The first condition may be satisfied when the storage unit stores the start-up information in a first period and when another execution condition is satisfied (hereinafter the same). .
The second condition may be satisfied in addition to the case where the storage unit stores the start-up information in the second period (hereinafter the same).
The second condition may be satisfied when the storage unit stores the start-up information in a second period and when other execution conditions are satisfied (hereinafter the same). .
One kind of prefetching notice among the plurality of kinds of prefetching notices may be a third prefetching notice (for example, prefetch effect 2) (hereinafter the same).

In the above explanation,
'Storage means (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) capable of storing at least start information;
A symbol display means (for example, a special symbol display device 212) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetch notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of prefetch notice;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of executing the symbol variation display corresponding to the start information,
One kind of prefetching notice among the plurality of kinds of prefetching notices is a first prefetching notice (for example, prefetching effect 3 of the variable prefetching notice),
One kind of prefetching notice among the plurality of kinds of prefetching notices is a second prefetching notice (for example, prefetching effect 1 of the prefetching notice at the time of winning),
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the first prefetch notice at least with a first probability when the first condition is satisfied,
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the first prefetch notice at least with a second probability when the second condition is satisfied,
The establishment requirement of the first condition includes at least that the storage unit stores the start-up information in a first period (for example, a time point during symbol variation display),
The establishment requirement of the second condition includes at least that the storage unit stores the start information in a second period (for example, a time point during symbol stop display),
The first period is different from the second period;
The first probability is the same probability as the second probability (for example, 2% in the case of FIG. 51D and 2% in the case of FIG. 51E),
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the second prefetch notice at least with a third probability when the first condition is satisfied,
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the second prefetch notice at least with a fourth probability when the second condition is satisfied,
The third probability is a probability different from the fourth probability (for example, 4% in the case of FIG. 51 (d) is 0% in the case of FIG. 51 (e)),
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In the above explanation,
“Storage means capable of storing at least start information (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300);
A symbol display means (for example, a special symbol display device 212) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetch notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of prefetch notice;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of executing the symbol variation display corresponding to the start information,
One kind of prefetching notice among the plurality of kinds of prefetching notices is a first prefetching notice (for example, prefetching effect 3 of the variable prefetching notice),
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the first prefetch notice at least with a first probability when the first condition is satisfied,
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the first prefetch notice at least with a second probability when the second condition is satisfied,
The establishment requirement of the first condition includes at least that the storage unit stores the start-up information in a first period (for example, a time point during symbol variation display),
The establishment requirement of the second condition includes at least that the storage unit stores the start information in a second period (for example, a time point during symbol stop display),
The first period is different from the second period;
The first probability is the same probability as the second probability (for example, 2% in the case of FIG. 51D and 2% in the case of FIG. 51E),
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the first prefetch notice in a third period,
The third period is any period of the period in which the symbol variation display is executed (for example, the time point in FIG. 55 (i)).
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In the above explanation,
“Storage means capable of storing at least start information (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300);
A symbol display means (for example, a special symbol display device 212) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetch notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of prefetch notice;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of executing the symbol variation display corresponding to the start information,
One kind of prefetching notice among the plurality of kinds of prefetching notices is a first prefetching notice (for example, prefetching effect 3 of the variable prefetching notice),
One kind of prefetching notice among the plurality of kinds of prefetching notices is a second prefetching notice (for example, a prefetching effect 1 of a winning prefetch notice and a pending change notice started from FIG. 55 (f)). ,
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the first prefetch notice at least with a first probability when the first condition is satisfied,
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the first prefetch notice at least with a second probability when the second condition is satisfied,
The establishment requirement of the first condition includes at least that the storage unit stores the start-up information in a first period (for example, a time point during symbol variation display),
The establishment requirement of the second condition includes at least that the storage unit stores the start information in a second period (for example, a time point during symbol stop display),
The first period is different from the second period;
The first probability is the same probability as the second probability (for example, 2% in the case of FIG. 51D and 2% in the case of FIG. 51E),
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing both the first prefetch notice and the second prefetch notice simultaneously (for example, see FIG. 55 (i)).
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In the above explanation,
“Storage means capable of storing at least start information (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300);
A symbol display means (for example, a special symbol display device 212) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetch notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of prefetch notice;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of executing the symbol variation display corresponding to the start information,
One kind of prefetching notice among the plurality of kinds of prefetching notices is a first prefetching notice (for example, prefetching effect 3 of the variable prefetching notice),
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the first prefetch notice at least with a first probability when the first condition is satisfied,
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the first prefetch notice at least with a second probability when the second condition is satisfied,
The establishment requirement of the first condition includes at least that the storage unit stores the start-up information in a first period (for example, a time point during symbol variation display),
The establishment requirement of the second condition includes at least that the storage unit stores the start information in a second period (for example, a time point during symbol stop display),
The first period is different from the second period;
The first probability is the same probability as the second probability (for example, 2% in the case of FIG. 51D and 2% in the case of FIG. 51E),
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the first prefetch notice in the symbol variation display started after the first period,
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the first prefetch notice in the symbol variation display started after the second period.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Furthermore, “comprising first control means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of controlling at least the symbol display means,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, it includes “production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least production,
The effect means is the prefetch notice means.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Also, “comprising second control means (for example, sub-control units 400, 500) capable of controlling at least the effect means,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, the first period may be any period among the periods in which the symbol variation display is executed.

The symbol display means is capable of executing at least symbol stop display (hereinafter referred to as “symbol stop display”) corresponding to the determination result.
The second period may be any period of the symbol stop display periods.

  Further, the second period may be any period of a specific effect period (for example, reach effect, SP reach effect, symbol promotion effect, etc.).

Further, the prefetching notice means can execute (start) at least the second prefetching notice with the third probability in any of the periods during which the symbol variation display is executed. And
The prefetching notice means is capable of executing (starting) at least the second prefetching notice with the fourth probability during any of the periods during which the symbol stop display is being executed. May be.

  The fourth probability may be lower than the third probability.

  The fourth probability may be zero.

In addition, the prefetch notice means can start the second prefetch notice at least with the fifth probability in any one of the periods in which the symbol variation display is executed,
The prefetch notice unit may be capable of starting the second prefetch notice at least with the sixth probability in any period of the period during which the symbol stop display is executed.

  Further, the sixth probability may be lower than the fifth probability.

  Further, the sixth probability may be zero.

Further, the prefetch notice means is capable of executing the second prefetch notice at least with a third probability when the third condition is satisfied,
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the second prefetch notice at least with a fourth probability when the fourth condition is satisfied,
The establishment requirement of the third condition includes at least that the storage means stores the start information in a fourth period,
The establishment requirement of the fourth condition includes at least that the storage means stores the start information in a fifth period,
When the fourth period is any one of the periods during which the symbol variation display is being executed, the prefetch notice unit is configured to perform the second change during the period during which the symbol variation display is being performed. A pre-reading notice can be started,
When the fifth period is any one of the periods in which the symbol variation display is performed, the prefetch notice unit is configured to execute the second change during the period in which the symbol variation display is being performed. A pre-reading notice can be started,
When the first period is any one of the periods in which the symbol variation display is being executed, the prefetching notice unit is executing a symbol variation display after the symbol variation display. The first look-ahead notice can be started during the period,
When the second period is any of the periods in which the symbol variation display is being executed, the prefetching notice unit is a period in which the symbol variation display is being executed after the symbol variation display. It may be possible to start the first prefetch notice.

  It should be noted that a temporal element taken as a period, such as the first period, can also be taken as a time point, such as a first time point.

  The points described above will be supplemented below, including duplication.

  Examples of the pre-reading notice (pre-reading effect) include on-hold display, winning sound effect and lamp lighting, pre-reading mode, operation of an accessory such as a moving effect body, button effect, vibration generation, and the like.

  The hold display may perform a plurality of displays for one hold. For example, in addition to the color change of the LED lamp, a plurality of displays may be performed using a liquid crystal display device such as the decorative symbol display device 208 or a sub liquid crystal display device.

  As a winning sound effect or lamp lighting, a sound effect may be output when winning or the color of the LED lamp may be changed. When the sound effect and the lamp lighting are combined, the sound effect may be output only at that time, and the color of the LED lamp may be continued as it is.

  As the pre-reading mode, for example, the pre-reading mode shift suggestion is performed at the time of winning a prize, and the actual mode shift may be at the time of starting the change of the next symbol or at the start of changing the symbol to be notified.

  As the operation of the actor such as the production movable body, when a plurality of symbol variation displays are continued, a predetermined operation may be performed for each symbol variation display or moved to a predetermined position at the time of winning a prize. After that, it may be kept in that position until the reservation subject to the advance notice.

  As the button effect, an effect that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 may be performed. After that, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the reception period, a predetermined effect may be performed. When a plurality of symbol variation displays are continued, a button effect may be performed for each symbol variation display.

  As the occurrence of vibration, when a plurality of symbol variation displays are continued, an effect may be performed in which the operating means (for example, the chance button 136) vibrates for each symbol variation display.

  In addition, a continuous performance may be performed as a pre-reading notice. For example, the effect display, the background display, the character display, and the output of the effect sound may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. Note that the sound output may be continued without stopping during the symbol stop display.

  Further, a plurality of types of effects may be performed with one pre-reading notice. A plurality of types of effects may be executed at the same timing, or the execution timing may be different.

  In addition, when the symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display) is started for a predetermined period of time simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display, when the symbol variation display is repeated a plurality of times, the prefetch announcement is performed every time the symbol variation display is started. It may be a continuous notice for a predetermined period. This continuous notice may be continued by a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays including the symbol fluctuation display subject to the prefetch notice, or may be continued by a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays not including the symbol fluctuation display.

  Alternatively, when the pre-reading notice is started, it may be a continuous notice that continues until the symbol fluctuation display subject to the pre-reading notice ends or until the symbol fluctuation display immediately before the symbol fluctuation display is finished. It may be a continuous notice. Examples of these continuous notices include a hold display and a change in the position of an accessory.

  Further, the pre-reading notice may be executed only for a moment. For example, it may be a pre-reading notice by sound output at the time of winning a prize.

  Furthermore, in the case where a plurality of types of prefetch notices are performed, the start timing of each prefetch notice is the same, but the end timings may be different. By doing this, there may be a time when a plurality of pre-reading notices overlap and a time when they do not overlap, which may improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the prefetch effect in the symbol variation display subject to the prefetch notice may be different from the prefetch effect in the symbol variation display until then in the start time, the execution period, and the number of executions. For example, in the pre-reading effect in the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice, the execution period is 10 seconds from the start of the variation. In the pre-reading effect in the symbol variation display until then, the execution period is 5 seconds from the start of the variation. Also good.

  Further, the pre-reading notice may be performed using any of a liquid crystal display device, an LED lamp, a sub liquid crystal display device, a speaker, a panel side device (for example, light emitting means), and a frame side device (for example, light emitting means). For example, in the case of a speaker, an upper speaker, a lower speaker, a bass speaker, or the like may be used properly. Further, it may be a pre-reading notice based on the position of the effect movable body (for example, movable liquid crystal display means) or the position of the effect movable body covering the sub liquid crystal display device. Alternatively, it may be a pre-reading notice by a device position different from the display or sound. For example, it may be a pre-reading notice based on the position of an accessory or a button. Further, it may be a pre-reading notice based on the orientation of the liquid crystal display device, the orientation of the speaker, or the like. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the pre-reading notice may be performed in the hold display region or in the decorative symbol display region. Further, the size of the liquid crystal display device (for example, a main liquid crystal display device, a sub liquid crystal display device, etc.) may be properly used, and the size of the speaker (for example, an upper speaker, a lower speaker, etc.) may be properly used. Further, the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a hold display area and a decorative symbol display area) may be used properly. Further, the size of what is displayed and the ratio of the display in the displayed area may be changed. For sound-related, the volume, sound output timing, tone, tempo, etc. may be changed. For display-related, the display timing and display method (for example, 2D display, 3D display, monochrome display, etc.) The color display may be changed. As described above, the proper use or changing method may be performed during symbol variation display and during stop display, or during stop display.

  In addition, the present invention is also applied during the stop display period when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the last symbol variation display in the electric support state and the symbol is stopped in the symbol variation display in the normal gaming state (non-electric support state). Is done. The present invention is also applied during the stop display of FIG. 2 in the normal gaming state (non-electric support state). In this case, during the special figure 2 symbol stop display, special 2 may have a hold, special 1 may have a hold, special 2 may have a hold, special 1 may have no hold, There is no hold in 2 and Special 1 may have a hold, Special 2 may have no hold, and Special 1 may have no hold. In addition, after the jackpot game ends, when the previous jackpot decorative symbol is displayed, the decorative symbol may be displayed or stopped. Further, the period in which the special figure 1 is stopped in the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 in the game stand that starts the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 after the big hit game is ended may be displayed during the stop display. Moreover, you may also make it into the object during the stop display of the symbol for which the other prefetching notice is already performed.

  In addition, the pre-reading notice based on the pre-determination result and the normal notice based on the main determination result may be performed at the same time or may be performed by the same production means. In these cases, the prefetch notice may be given priority over the normal notice, or the normal notice may be given priority over the prefetch notice.

  Further, the prefetching notice may be a so-called step-up notice. For example, when a combination of an accessory action and an effect display is performed as a pre-reading notice and performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, the effect display color may be stepped up to copper, silver, or gold. In addition, when the pre-reading notice is given by a sub display unit (for example, a display unit that does not display a decorative symbol change display) different from the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display unit displays the symbol change display or a stop display. A pre-reading notice may be performed regardless of the inside.

  Moreover, the state in which the pre-reading notice is not executed may be a mode in which the sub-control units 400 and 500 do not execute the pre-reading notice execution lottery, or the main control unit 300 does not pre-read the start information. It may be a mode in which pre-determination is not performed, the main control unit 300 may not transmit prefetch information to the first sub control unit 400, or the first sub control unit Even if 400 receives prefetch information, the aspect which does not use the prefetch information may be sufficient.

  Further, the pre-control notice execution lottery may be performed only when the sub-control units 400 and 500 receive the symbol variation start command and the pre-read information at the same timing.

  In addition, when the main control unit 300 acquires the start information during the stop display, the start information is prefetched or pre-determined during the stop display, and a command is transmitted to the sub control units 400 and 500 side. The control units 400 and 500 may perform lottery for pre-reading notice during stop display, and may make the pre-reading notice effective when the symbol variation display is started.

  In addition, when there is no hold, the pre-reading notice is not performed during the stop display, and when there is a hold, the pre-reading notice may be executed even during the stop display.

  In addition, when the first random number (for example, the start information of FIG. 1 or the start information of FIG. 2) is acquired during the stop display, the pre-reading notice is not performed even if the symbol variation display is started, and the second random number is displayed. If the random number (for example, the start information of FIG. 2 or the start information of FIG. 1) is acquired during the stop display, a pre-reading notice regarding the second random number is performed when the symbol variation display is started. May be.

  In addition, when the stop display is displayed after power interruption and power recovery, no pre-reading notice may be executed during the stop display, or the first type of pre-reading notice may not be executed. The pre-reading notice in the area may not be executed.

  In addition, if the stop display is displayed after power interruption and power recovery, no pre-reading notice may be executed until all the suspensions at a certain point in time (for example, suspension before power interruption) are completed. The type of prefetching notice may not be executed, or the prefetching notice in the first area may not be executed.

  Further, when receiving information from the main control unit 300 based on the random number (starting information) acquired during the stop display, the sub-control units 400 and 500 may execute a process different from the normal process, Different information may be used. For example, when performing the lottery determination of the prefetching notice, the prefetching information transmitted from the main control unit may not be referred to, or even if it is referred, the lottery of the prefetching notice execution may be skipped. Good.

  Further, the probability that the hold display is displayed in the default display mode is higher than the probability that the hold display is displayed in the pre-read notice display mode. In addition, the display mode of the prefetch notice is more easily selected when the prior determination result is a win than when it is a loss. Further, the display mode of the pre-reading notice may be one type or plural types, and in addition to the default display mode and the display mode of the pre-reading notice, a display mode that suggests the development of reach production In addition, there may be other display modes such as a display mode for notifying the usual map.

  In addition, when at least one of the types of pre-reading notices has a lower execution probability when the stop display is displayed than when the pattern changes are displayed, the execution probability of the pre-reading notice during the stop display is displayed as a pattern change. If the type of the prefetching notice that is lower than the middle and the type that is not so (for example, the type of the prefetching notice that the execution probability of the prefetching notice during the stop display is the same as that during the symbol variation display) are prepared, the number of the former type The number may be less than the number of the latter type, may be more, or may be the same. For example, in the display-type prefetching notice, only one type of prefetching notice has a low execution probability (including an execution probability of 0%), but the sound type prefetching notice does not have to be of a type in which the execution probability is low. . Furthermore, the type of pre-reading notice in which the execution period of the pre-reading notice during the stop display is shorter than that during the display of the symbol variation, and the type that is not so (for example, the execution period of the pre-reading notice in the stop display is not different from that during the symbol change display. When the type of the pre-reading notice) is prepared, the number of the former types may be smaller, more, or the same as the number of the latter types. For example, in the display-type prefetching notice, only one type of prefetching notice has a low execution period (including the execution period of 0 seconds), but the sound-type prefetching notice may not have a kind in which the execution period is short. .

  In addition, the execution probability of the pre-reading notice during the stop display depends on the control state at that time (whether it is a probable change state, whether it is a power support state), the number of holds, whether it is a stop display of jackpot symbol, etc. May be different.

  In addition, the number of types of prefetching notices for which the execution probability of prefetching notices during the stop display is low is the number of types that are not so (for example, the types of prefetching notices in which the execution probability of the prefetching notice during stop display is not different from that during symbol display) The number may be greater than, less than, or the same. For example, three modes of blue, green, and red are prepared as display modes of the pre-reading notice in the hold display, and there are cases where the other types of pre-reading notices have only one mode in the accessory operation.

  In addition, in the mode in which the execution probability of the pre-reading notice is lower in the case of the big hit symbol stop display than in the case of the big symbol change display, in the case of the special figure 2, in the non-electric support and the electric support, The execution probabilities of the prefetch notice may be different.

  In addition, when the big hit symbol of special figure 1 is being stopped (determined being displayed), the execution probability of the pre-reading notice is lower than when the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is being stopped (definitely being displayed). May be. In this case, it includes 0% execution probability, that is, no execution.

  Further, the state in which the variation time determination table in which the variation time tends to be shorter (second state) is used (the second state) uses the variation time determination table in which the variation time tends to be longer (first state). In addition, the aspect in which the execution probability of the pre-reading notice is lower can also be applied to a game machine that changes the variation time determination table when the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times after the small hit game ends. Also, after the big hit game, the transition to the special figure high probability normal figure low probability is made, and the change time is determined while the control state is maintained (for example, the timing when the symbol change display is performed a predetermined number of times after the big hit game ends) It can also be applied to a game table that changes the table.

  Further, even if the pre-reading notice using the display (for example, the predetermined LED lamp, the predetermined area in the liquid crystal display device, the pre-reading notice using the sub liquid crystal display device) is not executed during the super reach production, The prefetching notice using sound may be executable. In addition, pre-reading notices that were not performed during the super reach production can be made effective after the super reach production, during the special figure fixed display period, during the shaking stop display, after the background return on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc. Also good.

  It should be noted that the present invention can also be applied to a game machine capable of executing an effect with a period during which no hold display is performed (for example, pseudo continuous fluctuation or super reach effect). Further, the present invention can also be applied to a game machine capable of executing an effect (for example, during pseudo continuous fluctuation) in which a hold display is displayed or not is displayed a plurality of times.

  In addition, there are a plurality of types of decorative symbol stop modes, and during the stop display in one of the stop modes (first stop mode), in the mode in which the execution probability of the pre-reading notice is lower than during the decorative symbol variation display, The stop mode (first stop mode) may be a pseudo-stop mode in pseudo-continuous fluctuation, a mode of shaking stop display (temporary stop display), or before promotion effect or promotion It may be a big hit symbol temporary stop display after production, or a special reach development symbol temporary stop display (including false temporary stop display).

  Further, during the period of symbol stop display, the probability that the pre-reading notice is started may be 0, that is, the execution probability may be 0. In addition, during the period of the symbol stop display, the probability that the pre-reading notice regarding the non-specific determination result (for example, losing) is started more than the probability that the pre-reading notice regarding the specific result (for example, the big hit) is started. May be lower. Further, during the symbol stop display period, the probability that a pre-reading notice regarding a non-specific determination result (for example, a loss) is started may be zero. In addition, during the symbol stop display period, the probability that the pre-reading notice is started in at least some or all of the plurality of effect means is lower than during the symbol change display period. There may be. The plurality of effect means here include, for example, display means, sound output means, light emitting means, movable means, and the like.

  In addition, during the symbol stop display period, the probability that at least some or all of the types of pre-reading notices will start is lower than during the symbol variable display period. May be. The plural types of prefetching notices here include a prefetching notice that starts at the time of winning a prize, a prefetching notice that starts at a predetermined timing during symbol variation display, and the like. Examples of the prefetching notice that starts when winning a prize include a prefetching notice using a hold display, a prefetching notice by voice output, a prefetching notice by light emission of a lamp, and a prefetching notice by the operation of a movable object. Further, examples of the prefetching notice during the symbol variation display include a prefetching preview for displaying a specific image (for example, a character image) on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the symbol variation display, a prefetching preview for performing a dedicated background display, and the like. It is done. The predetermined timing during symbol variation display may be the same timing as the start of symbol variation display, may be the timing after a predetermined time has elapsed since the beginning of symbol variation, or may be the predetermined timing after the symbol variation start. It may be the timing at the start of production (for example, at the time of first stop, at the time of second stop, or at the start of reach production).

  Further, the pre-reading notice that is started during the symbol variable display period may share at least a part of the notification mode with the pre-reading notice that is started during the symbol stop-display period. For example, at least part or all of the sound may be common, at least part or all of the display may be common, or at least part or all of the light emission mode of the lamp may be common. Alternatively, at least a part or all of the operation mode of the movable object may be common. Here, the pre-reading notice common to some or all may be performed based on the same effect data in the common part.

  In addition, during the period of the stop display of the symbol, the execution probability of the increase animation of the hold display may be lower than during the period of the variable display of the symbol, and further, during the period of the stop display of the symbol, The execution probability of the increase animation of the hold display may be zero.

  In addition, a hold increase sound may be notified when the hold increases, and the hold increase sound may have the same execution probability during the symbol stop display and the symbol variation display, or during the symbol stop display. The execution probability may be lower, and furthermore, the execution probability during the symbol stop display may be zero. Here, the hold increase sound may be an effect performed in combination with the hold display, or may be an effect performed alone.

  In addition, the hold display may be displayed on a display means on which a decorative symbol variation display is performed, or a display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device, The first special symbol hold lamp 218 and the second special symbol hold lamp 220 may be displayed on different display means).

  The execution probability of the pre-reading notice may be lower during the first hold number period than during the second hold number period. Further, the execution probability of the pre-reading notice may be lower during the period of the symbol stop display in the first reserved number state than during the period of the symbol variation display in the first reserved number state. And may be the same. Further, the execution probability of the pre-reading notice may be 0 during the period of the symbol stop display in the first reserved number state. The first hold number here may be a number smaller than the second hold number, and may be 0, for example. Further, the second holding number may be 1 or more, or may be an upper limit value if a holding upper limit value is provided.

  The present invention can also be applied to a sealed pachinko machine.

  FIG. 59 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 59, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 59 encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine and uses the enclosed sphere as a launching sphere. May be executed by credit.

  Furthermore, although the example which applied this invention to the pachinko machine was demonstrated here, this invention is applicable also to a rotation game machine (slot machine).

In the above description, “The symbol display means (for example, the special symbol display devices 212 and 214) can execute symbol variation display at least when the symbol variation condition is satisfied,
The establishment requirement of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area (for example, the special figure start port 230, 232).
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

Further, “The symbol display means is capable of at least suspending the operation when the holding condition is established,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the establishment requirement of the hold condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “when the holding condition is established, it is at least possible to increase the number of times the operation of the symbol display means is held,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In the above description,
“A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display,
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a prefetch notice;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of at least stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination.
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the prefetch notice at a first probability at a first time during the symbol variation display;
The prefetching notice means is capable of executing the prefetching notice at a second probability at a second time point during the stop display;
The second probability is lower than the first probability.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Explained.

  The first time point may be a time point during a period in which super reach is not performed. In addition, the second time point may be a time point during a fixed display period or a stop display time point. Further, the stop display may include a big hit game. In a big hit game in which a round hit (attacker opening / closing operation) is performed after the big hit game start effect, the stop display includes the big hit game start effect but not during the round hit effect. May be.

In the above description, “a symbol display means (for example, special symbol display devices 212 and 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
Prefetching notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of prefetching notices (for example, a plurality of kinds of prefetching effects shown in FIG. 51A);
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of stopping and displaying at least a symbol aspect (for example, a special symbol stop symbol aspect shown in FIG. 5A) corresponding to the result of the determination.
At least one type of prefetching notice among the plurality of types of prefetching notices is a first prefetching notice (for example, a prefetching notice at the time of winning a prize by effect A (prefetch effect 1)),
The prefetching notice means shows the first prefetching notice at a first probability (for example, a time point before the super reach production) at the first time point during the symbol variation display (for example, FIG. 51 (d)). (Probability based on random number range specified in the lottery table))
The prefetching advance notice means draws the first prefetching notice at a second probability (for example, a certain point during fixed display) at the second time point during the stop display (for example, the lottery shown in FIG. 51 (e)). Probability based on the random number range specified in the table, and at least 0%)
The second probability is lower than the first probability.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

The symbol display means can execute at least the symbol variation display when the symbol variation condition is established,
The establishment requirement of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area (for example, the special figure start port 230, 232).
A game stand characterized by that. I explained that it may be.

Further, “The symbol variation display is at least capable of performing the stop display for a predetermined time (for example, 0.6 seconds).
A game stand characterized by that. I explained that it may be.

Further, “comprising control means capable of executing at least control of the symbol display means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes steps S225 and S227),
A game stand characterized by that. I explained that it may be.

Further, “the control means is capable of executing at least control for suspending the operation of the symbol display means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes step S217) when a holding condition is established. is there,
A game stand characterized by that. I explained that it may be.

In addition, “the requirement for establishment of the holding condition is a requirement that includes at least that a game ball has entered the starting area (for example, the special drawing starting port 230, 232).
A game stand characterized by that. I explained that it may be.

Further, “the control means is capable of executing at least control for increasing the number of times the operation of the symbol display means is suspended when the holding condition is satisfied (for example, control in step S217). is there,
A game stand characterized by that. I explained that it may be.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. I explained that it may be.

In the above description, “a symbol display means (for example, special symbol display devices 212 and 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetching notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a prefetching notice;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of stopping and displaying at least a winning symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the winning / failing determination (for example, the stopping symbol aspect of the special symbol A shown in FIG. 5A),
The prefetching notice means displays the prefetching notice at a first probability (for example, FIG. 51 (FIG. 51), for example, at a first time point (for example, a time point before the super reach effect) during the symbol variation display in which the winning symbol mode is stopped and displayed. In the lottery table shown in d), the prior determination result is at least executable with a probability based on a random number range of “big hit”,
The prefetching notice means shows the prefetching notice at a second probability (for example, FIG. 51 (e)) at a second time point (for example, a certain time point during fixed display) during the stop display of the winning symbol mode. In the lottery table, the pre-determination result is at least executable with a probability based on a random number range of “big hit”,
The second probability is lower than the first probability.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In the above description, “a symbol display means (for example, special symbol display devices 212 and 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetching notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a prefetching notice;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of stopping and displaying at least a symbol aspect (for example, a special symbol stop symbol aspect shown in FIG. 5A) corresponding to the result of the determination.
The prefetch notice means can execute the prefetch notice at least with a first probability during the stop display in a first state (for example, a state where the table 6 is used),
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the prefetch notice at least with a second probability during the stop display in a second state (for example, a state where the table 4 is used).
The first state is a state in which the time of the symbol variation display is likely to be longer than the second state,
The second probability is a probability different from the first probability.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description, “effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least the decorative symbol variation display;
A prefetching notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a prefetching notice;
A game machine equipped with
The effect display means is capable of executing at least a super reach effect during the variation display of the decorative symbol,
The effect display means is capable of at least stopping and displaying a decorative symbol pattern (for example, a combination of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 5C) corresponding to the result of the determination.
The prefetching notice means sets the prefetching notice to a first probability (for example, a probability based on the random number range defined in the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (d)) at the first time point during the display of the decorative symbol variation. ) Is at least viable,
The prefetching notice means defines the prefetching notice at a second time (for example, a certain time during the fixed display) during the stop display with a second probability (for example, a lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (e)). A probability based on a random number range) that is at least feasible,
The second probability is lower than the first probability;
The first time point is a time point before the super reach production is started,
The prefetch notice means does not execute the prefetch notice during the super reach production (for example, FIG. 42 (d) to FIG. 42 (f)),
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the prefetching notice unit is capable of executing at least a prefetching notice that has not been executed during the super reach production after the super reach production and before the stop display (for example, FIG. 42 (g))
A game stand characterized by that. I explained that it may be.

Further, “effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a decorative symbol variation display;
A prefetching notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a prefetching notice;
A game machine equipped with
The effect display means displays a variation display of the decorative symbols in a plurality of types of stop modes (for example, a fixed display (FIG. 42 (h)), a pseudo stop (FIGS. 42 (c) and (e)), a shaking stop display (FIG. 42 (k)) can be stopped at least in one stop mode,
At least one of the plurality of types of stop modes is a first stop mode (for example, pseudo stop (FIGS. 42 (c) and (e)),
The pre-reading notice means selects the pre-reading notice at a first probability (for example, a point before the super reach production) during the variation display of the decorative symbol, for a first probability (for example, the lottery shown in FIG. 51 (d)). (Probability based on the random number range specified in the table))
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing at least a second probability at the second time point during the stop display according to the first stop mode, the prefetch notice.
The second probability is lower than the first probability (FIGS. 42 (c) and (e)),
A game stand characterized by that. I explained that it may be.

  The first stop mode may be a fixed display (main stop) stop mode, and the second stop mode may be a pseudo-display (temporary stop) stop mode. The mode may be a stop mode of shaking stop display.

In the above description, “a symbol display means (for example, special symbol display devices 212 and 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetching notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a prefetching notice;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of stopping and displaying at least a symbol aspect (for example, a special symbol stop symbol aspect shown in FIG. 5A) corresponding to the result of the determination.
The prefetching notice means displays the prefetching notice at a first probability (for example, a point before the super reach production) in the symbol variation display with a first probability (for example, a lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (d)). (Probability based on a specified random range)
The prefetch notice means defines the prefetch notice in a second probability (for example, a lottery table shown in FIG. 52B) at a second time point during the stop display (for example, a certain time point during fixed display). A probability based on a random number range) that is at least feasible,
The second probability is lower than the first probability;
The prefetch notice means is capable of at least executing the prefetch notice at the first time point in the first mode (for example, production A),
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the prefetch notice at least in a second mode (for example, production D) at the second time point,
The first aspect is an aspect at least partially different from the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “comprising first control means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of controlling at least the symbol display means,
A game stand characterized by that. I explained that it may be.

In addition, “providing production means (for example, decorative design display device 208 and speaker 120) capable of at least producing the production,
The effect means is the prefetch notice means.
A game stand characterized by that. I explained that it may be.

Also, “comprising second control means (for example, sub-control means 400, 500) capable of controlling at least the effect means,
A game stand characterized by that. I explained that it may be.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. I explained that it may be.

  Note that the gaming table may be a slot machine.

Further, “a symbol display means (for example, special symbol display devices 212 and 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetching notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a prefetching notice;
A number-of-holds display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least the number of holds by the number of held icons;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of stopping and displaying at least a symbol aspect (for example, a special symbol stop symbol aspect shown in FIG. 5A) corresponding to the result of the determination.
The number of suspensions represents at least the number of times that the operation of the symbol display means is suspended,
The prefetching notice means displays the prefetching notice at a first probability (for example, a point before the super reach production) in the symbol variation display with a first probability (for example, a lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (d)). (Probability based on a specified random range)
The prefetch notice means defines the prefetch notice in a second probability (for example, a lottery table shown in FIG. 52B) at a second time point during the stop display (for example, a certain time point during fixed display). A probability based on a random number range) that is at least feasible,
The second probability is lower than the first probability;
The holding number display means is capable of displaying at least the holding icon in a first display mode (for example, an increase animation according to a default mode shown in FIG. 51 (b)),
The prefetch notice means causes the hold number display means to display the hold icon at the first time point in a second display mode (for example, an increase animation according to the prefetch notice mode shown in FIG. 51 (c)). And at least the prefetch notice can be executed,
The prefetch advance notice means causes the hold number display means to display the hold icon at the second time point in a third display mode (for example, a momentary additional display according to the prefetch advance notice form), so that the prefetch advance notice is displayed. Is at least feasible,
The second display mode is a display mode that is at least partially different from the third display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “a symbol display means (for example, special symbol display devices 212 and 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetching notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a prefetching notice;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of stopping and displaying at least a symbol aspect (for example, a special symbol stop symbol aspect shown in FIG. 5A) corresponding to the result of the determination.
The prefetching notice means displays the prefetching notice at a first probability (for example, a point before the super reach production) in the symbol variation display with a first probability (for example, a lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (d)). (Probability based on a specified random range)
The prefetching notice means defines the prefetching notice at a second time (for example, a certain time during the fixed display) during the stop display with a second probability (for example, a lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (e)). A probability based on a random number range) that is at least feasible,
The second probability is lower than the first probability;
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the prefetch notice at least with a third probability during a period of a first holding number (for example, 0),
The prefetch notice means is capable of executing the prefetch notice at least with a fourth probability during a period of a second holding number (for example, 1 or more),
The number of suspensions represents at least the number of times that the operation of the symbol display means is suspended,
The third probability is a probability different from the fourth probability.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The pre-reading notice may be a notice that is executed when a game ball has entered at least a startable area.

  The third probability may be lower than the fourth probability. On the contrary, the third probability may be higher than the fourth probability.

In addition, “a start area where game balls can enter at least (for example, special drawing start ports 230, 232),
A symbol display means (for example, special symbol display devices 212 and 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
Prefetching notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of prefetching notices (for example, a plurality of kinds of prefetching effects shown in FIG. 51A);
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of stopping and displaying at least a symbol aspect (for example, a special symbol stop symbol aspect shown in FIG. 5A) corresponding to the result of the determination.
One kind of prefetching notice among the plurality of kinds of prefetching notices is a first prefetching notice (for example, production A),
One kind of prefetching notice among the plurality of kinds of prefetching notices is a second prefetching notice (for example, production C),
The prefetching notice means shows the first prefetching notice at a first probability (for example, a time point before the super reach production) at the first time point during the symbol variation display (for example, FIG. 51 (d)). (Probability based on random number range specified in the lottery table))
The prefetching advance notice means draws the first prefetching notice at a second probability (for example, a certain point during fixed display) at the second time point during the stop display (for example, the lottery shown in FIG. 51 (e)). Probability based on the random number range specified in the table, and at least 0%)
The second probability is lower than the first probability;
The second look-ahead notice is a look-ahead notice that is executed during the symbol variation display that starts after the game ball enters the start area,
The prefetching notice means can execute the second prefetching notice at the first time point with at least a third probability;
The prefetching notice means can execute the second prefetching notice at the second time point with at least a fourth probability;
The third probability is the same probability as the fourth probability.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Note that the first prefetching notice may be a prefetching notice that is executed when a game ball enters the start area.

Further, “a symbol display means (for example, special symbol display devices 212 and 214) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
Prefetching notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of prefetching notices (for example, a plurality of kinds of prefetching effects shown in FIG. 51A);
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of stopping and displaying at least a symbol aspect (for example, a special symbol stop symbol aspect shown in FIG. 5A) corresponding to the result of the determination.
The prefetching notice means is configured to provide at least one prefetching notice of the plurality of kinds of prefetching notices at a first time point during the symbol variation display (for example, a time point before the super reach effect). It can be executed at least with a probability (for example, a probability based on a random number range defined in the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (d)),
The prefetch notice means has a second probability at a second time point during the stop display (for example, a certain time point during fixed display) at least one of the plurality of types of prefetch notices. (For example, the probability based on the random number range defined in the lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (e)) is at least executable.
The second probability is lower than the first probability.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
A symbol display section that can stop and display symbols;
Start information deriving means for deriving start information when a game ball enters the start area;
Starting information storage means capable of storing the derived starting information up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Starting information acquisition means for acquiring starting information from the starting information storage means;
A determination unit for determining whether or not the vehicle is correct based on the acquired starting information;
Symbol display control means for controlling the symbol display to stop the symbol variation stop display for displaying the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined variation display time; ,
When the result of the success / failure determination is a specific success / failure determination result, the second advantage is higher than the first advantage from the normal gaming state in which the advantage to the player is the first advantage. Special game transition control means for transitioning the control state to a special game state that is a degree,
The advance notice informed whether the start information stored in the start information storage means is a specific result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means, rather than execution of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means. A prior notice means to be executed before;
A game machine equipped with
When the advance information storage means stores the start information during the symbol stop display, the advance notice notification means does not execute the advance notice for the start information during the symbol stop display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the advance notice notification is not executed means that only the advance notice notification lottery is not executed, the lottery is executed but the advance notice notification is not executed (after the symbol change), the lottery is executed and the symbol change Various patterns are included, such as performing prior notice notification later.

(Appendix 2)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
The symbol display control means variably displays the symbol over a predetermined variation display time, and then temporarily displays the symbol to stop the symbol variation stop corresponding to the determination result. Control to display on the symbol display unit,
If the advance information storage means stores the start information during the symbol temporary stop display, the advance notice notification means executes the advance notice for the start information during the symbol temporary stop display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The temporary stop display here may be during so-called fluctuation fluctuation, and also includes a pseudo stop in a so-called pseudo series.

(Appendix 3)
In the game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
The advance notice notification means can execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice in the advance notice, and the start information storage means stores start information during the symbol stop display. In the case, the first advance notice for the start information is not executed during the symbol stop display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the first prior notice notification may be, for example, a reservation pre-reading effect display performed in the symbol display unit. Further, the second prior notice notification may be, for example, a hold pre-reading effect display (such as changing the hold display mode) performed in the hold display unit.

  In addition, the non-execution of the first advance notice is based on the lottery result of the first advance notice, even if the second advance notice (including other advance notices) is performed while the symbol is stopped. You may perform a 1st prior notice notification (2nd prior notice information) after a fluctuation | variation start.

(Appendix 4)
In the game stand according to appendices 1-3,
A pre-notice notification unit having a first area that is an area in which the advance notice is executed and a second area that is narrower than the first area;
When the start information storage means stores the start information during the symbol stop display, the prior notice notification means is configured to display the start information during the symbol stop display in the first area of the advance notice notification unit. The advance notice notification of
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first area referred to here may be a symbol display section, for example, and the second area narrower than the first area may be a hold display section, for example.

  In addition, the non-execution of prior notice notification means that, based on the preliminary notice notice lottery result in the first area, even if the prior notice notice is given in the second area while the symbol is stopped, the first area ( Advance notice may be given in the second area).

(Appendix 5)
In the game stand according to appendices 1 to 4,
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, comprising a normal gaming state transition control means for shifting the control state from the first normal gaming state of the normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state,
The prior notice notification means is configured such that the game state during the symbol change during the symbol stop display and immediately before the symbol stop display is the first normal game state and the game state during the symbol change immediately after the symbol stop display is When the start information storage means stores the start information during the symbol stop display in the second normal gaming state, the advance notice for the start information is not executed during the symbol stop display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
There is a plurality of types of pre-reading notices, and at least one of the pre-reading notices has a lower execution probability when the symbol is stopped than when the symbol is changing.

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine characterized by a lower probability of executing the pre-reading notice when the jackpot symbol is stopped than when the jackpot symbol is changing.

(Appendix 8)
A gaming machine, wherein the first state and the second state (the variation time determination table is different in the same gaming state) have different execution probabilities of the pre-reading notice while the symbol is stopped.

(Appendix 9)
A game machine characterized in that the prefetching notice execution probability is lower when the symbol is stopped than when the symbol is stopped, and when the prefetching notice is not executed, the prefetching notice is delayed.

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine characterized in that there are a plurality of types of symbol stop displays, and one of the symbol stop displays has a lower execution probability of the pre-reading notice than during symbol variation.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendix 6 to appendix 10,
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is established,
The symbol variation condition includes at least that there was a ball in the starting area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendix 6 to appendix 11,
The symbol variation display is to stop display the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure after performing the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendix 6 to appendix 12,
At least control means capable of executing at least control of the symbol display means;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The gaming machine according to appendix 13,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for suspending the operation of the symbol display means when a holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
The game stand according to appendix 14,
The holding condition includes at least that there was a ball in the starting area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to appendix 14 or appendix 15,
The control means is capable of executing at least control for increasing the number of the operation holding balls when the holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendix 6 to appendix 16,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a prefetch notice;
A game machine equipped with
During the stop display period of the symbol, the probability that the pre-reading notice is started is lower than during the variable display period of the symbol,
The pre-reading notice that is started during the symbol variable display period is at least partly different from the pre-reading notice that is started during the symbol stop display period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A decorative symbol display means capable of executing at least a decorative symbol display;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a prefetch notice;
A game machine equipped with
During the stop display period of the symbol, the probability that the pre-reading notice is started is lower than during the variable display period of the symbol,
The decorative design display means is capable of displaying at least a first display,
The first display is a display showing at least holding information,
The first display that is started during the symbol variable display period is at least partially different from the first display that is started during the symbol stop display period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a prefetch notice;
A game machine equipped with
During the stop display period of the symbol, the probability that the pre-reading notice is started is lower than during the variable display period of the symbol,
During the period of the first holding number, the probability that the pre-reading notice is executed is different from that during the period of the second holding number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
A starting opening through which game balls can enter at least;
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least one of a plurality of prefetch notices;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of prefetch notices is a first prefetch notice,
At least one of the plurality of prefetch notices is a second prefetch notice,
During the period of display stop of the symbol, the probability that the first pre-reading notice is started is lower than during the period of variable display of the symbol,
The probability that the second pre-reading notice is executed when a game ball enters the start port during the stop display period of the symbol is a first probability,
The probability that the second pre-reading notice is executed when a game ball enters the start port during the period of the symbol variation display is a second probability,
The first probability is the same as the second probability.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
A starting opening through which game balls can enter at least;
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least one of a plurality of prefetch notices;
A game machine equipped with
During the stop display period of the symbol, the probability that the pre-reading notice is started is lower than during the variable display period of the symbol,
During the stop display period of the symbol, the probability that the pre-reading notice is executed is lower than during the variable display period of the symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 18 to 22,
Comprising first control means capable of controlling at least the symbol display means;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 18 to 23,
Providing production means that can at least produce production,
The effect means is the prefetch notice means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to appendix 24,
A second control means capable of controlling at least the effect means;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 18 to 25,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A)
A determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure;
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of prefetch notice;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of prefetching notices is a first prefetching notice,
At least one of the plurality of types of prefetching notices is a second prefetching notice,
The symbol variation display is to stop and display a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display.
The execution probability of the first prefetch notice is lower during the stop display period than during the variable display period,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A)
A game machine as described in appendix i,
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is established,
The requirement for establishment of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the starting area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C)
A game machine as described in appendix a or i,
Comprising control means capable of executing at least control of the symbol display means;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D)
A game machine as described in appendix c,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for suspending the operation of the symbol display means when a holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix O)
A game machine according to appendix d,
The establishment requirement of the holding condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F)
The game stand according to claim d or o,
The control means is capable of executing at least control for increasing the number of times that the operation of the symbol display means is held when the holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note)
The game machine according to any one of the appendix Ano appendix,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note)
A determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure;
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a prefetch notice;
Control means capable of executing at least control for shifting the state;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol variation display is capable of at least executing a symbol pattern stop display corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display.
The control means is capable of executing at least control for shifting the state from the first state to the second state after the first symbol aspect is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means.
The first symbol aspect is a symbol aspect corresponding to a jackpot in the result of the success / failure determination,
The first state is one of a plurality of types of non-hit states,
The second state is a jackpot state,
At least one of the plurality of types of non-hit states is a first non-hit state,
At least one of the plurality of types of non-hit states is a second non-hit state,
At least one of the plurality of types of non-hit states is a third non-hit state,
The second non-hit state is an advantageous state over the first non-hit state,
The third non-hit state is an advantageous state over the first non-hit state,
The second non-hit state is a state that can be shifted after the big hit state,
The third non-hit state is a state that can be shifted after the second non-hit state,
The third non-big hit state has a lower execution probability of the look-ahead notice than the second non-big hit state,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note)
A game machine as set forth in appendix
The first non-hit state is a non-electric support state,
The second non-hit state is an electric support state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note)
A game stand as described in appendix ku or ke,
The third non-hit state is an electric support state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note)
A game machine according to appendix ku to appendix co,
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is established,
The requirement for establishment of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the starting area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note)
The game stand according to any one of appendix ku to appendix sa,
The control means is capable of at least controlling the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix)
A game machine as set forth in the appendix,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for suspending the operation of the symbol display means when a holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix)
A gaming machine as set forth in the Appendix,
The establishment requirement of the holding condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix S)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix or Se,
The control means is capable of executing at least control for increasing the number of times that the operation of the symbol display means is held when the holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note)
The game stand according to any one of the supplementary notes to the supplementary notes,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C)
A determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a prefetch notice;
Production control means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production modes;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of effect modes is a first effect mode,
At least one of the plurality of types of effect modes is a second effect mode,
The production control means is capable of executing at least control for shifting from the first production mode to the second production mode,
The second presentation mode has a lower execution probability of the prefetch notice than the first presentation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix)
A game machine as described in appendix h,
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is established,
The requirement for establishment of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the starting area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note)
A game machine as described in appendix,
Comprising control means capable of executing at least control of the symbol display means;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix G)
A game machine as described in appendix te,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for suspending the operation of the symbol display means when a holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix N)
A gaming machine as described in appendix t,
The establishment requirement of the holding condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix D)
A game machine as described in appendix t or na,
The control means is capable of executing at least control for increasing the number of times that the operation of the symbol display means is held when the holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Note)
The game stand according to any one of appendices C to D,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix N)
A determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure;
A variation time determining means capable of determining at least a variation time using at least one variation time table of the plurality of variation time tables;
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display over the variation time;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a prefetch notice;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a first variable time table,
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a second variable time table;
The second state has a lower execution probability of the prefetch notice than the first state,
The first state is a state in which the variation time determination means determines the variation time using at least the first variation time table,
The second state is a state in which the variation time determination means determines the variation time using at least the second variation time table.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary note)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix N,
The first variation time table includes a plurality of variation times,
The second variation time table includes a plurality of variation times.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix C)
A game machine as described in appendix Ne or C,
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is established,
The requirement for establishment of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the starting area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix H)
The game stand according to any one of Appendix N to Appendix C,
Comprising control means capable of executing at least control of the symbol display means;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix H,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for suspending the operation of the symbol display means when a holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix F)
A game machine as described in appendix f,
The establishment requirement of the holding condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix E)
A game table as described in appendix f or f,
The control means is capable of executing at least control for increasing the number of times that the operation of the symbol display means is held when the holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix M)
The game stand according to any one of the supplementary notes to the supplementary notes,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix Mi)
A determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure;
A variation time determining means capable of determining at least a variation time using at least one variation time table of the plurality of variation time tables;
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display over the variation time;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a prefetch notice;
Production control means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production modes;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a first variable time table,
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a second variable time table;
At least one of the plurality of types of effect modes is a first effect mode,
At least one of the plurality of types of effect modes is a second effect mode,
The production control means is capable of executing at least a control for making a transition from the first production mode to the second production mode when the production mode transition condition is established,
The first effect mode is a state in which the variation time determination means determines the variation time using at least the first variation time table,
The second rendering mode is a state in which the variation time determination means determines the variation time using at least the second variation time table.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix M)
A game machine according to appendix Mi,
The first variation time table includes a plurality of variation times,
The second variation time table includes a plurality of variation times.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix)
A game machine as described in appendix Mi or Mu,
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is established,
The requirement for establishment of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the starting area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix M)
The game stand according to any one of Appendix M to Appendix M,
Comprising control means capable of executing at least control of the symbol display means;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix Y)
A game machine as described in appendix,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for suspending the operation of the symbol display means when a holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix Y,
The establishment requirement of the holding condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix Yo)
A game stand as described in appendix ya or yu,
The control means is capable of executing at least control for increasing the number of times that the operation of the symbol display means is held when the holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix w)
The game stand according to any one of appendix Mi to appendix yo,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of embodiment described above, a modification, or an additional remark, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or an additional remark.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 Decorative symbol display device 208a Left symbol display region 208b Middle symbol display region 208c Right symbol display region 208d Effect display region 212 First special symbol display device 214 Second special symbol display device 230 First special diagram start Port 232 Second special drawing start port 2321 Blade member 234 Variable winning port 2341 Door member 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 Second sub-control unit 600 Dispensing control unit 291-295 On-hold display

Claims (6)

A determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure;
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of prefetch notice;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of prefetching notices is a first prefetching notice,
At least one of the plurality of types of prefetching notices is a second prefetching notice,
The symbol variation display is capable of performing at least a symbol pattern stop display corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display.
The state of the stop display is more difficult to execute the first look-ahead notice than the state of the variable display,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is established,
The requirement for establishment of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the starting area.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The symbol display means is capable of at least suspending operation when a holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
The establishment requirement of the holding condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3 or 4,
When the holding condition is established, it is at least possible to increase the number of times the operation of the symbol display means is held.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.